Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 96

Air Cylinder

Series MB
ø32, ø40, ø50, ø63, ø80, ø100, ø125

CJ1
CJP
CJ2
CM2
CG1
MB
MB1
CA2
CS1
CS2

t
ne
ag t g ry
-m o tin so
in bo s
ilt- d ou
n ce
Variations Bu Ro M Ac
Standard stroke (mm)
JIS Symbol Basic Standard
50 100 150 200 300 400 500 700 900 Axial foot Rod end nut
Bore 25 75 125 175 250 350 450 600 800 1000 Option
Single rod Rod side flange Knuckle joint pin Page
Head side flange Clevis pin 290
Series MB Single clevis Single knuckle joint
Double knuckle joint
32 Double clevis Trunnion pivot bracket
Center trunnion Double clevis pivot bracket

JIS Symbol Standard


Basic Rod end nut
Option
Double rod 40 Foot Kuckle joint pin Page
Flange Single knuckle joint 299
Standard/Double acting

Series MBW Double knuckle joint


Center trunnion Trunnion pivot
bracket

∗ JIS Symbol 50 Basic Standard


Axial foot Rod end nut
Non- Rod side flange
Option
Knuckle joint pin Page
rotating rod Head side flange Clevis pin 305
Single clevis Single knuckle joint
Series MBK Double clevis Double knuckle joint
Trunnion pivot bracket
63 Center trunnion Double clevis pivot bracket

∗ JIS Symbol Basic Standard


Rod end nut
Axial foot Option
(1)
Low friction Rod side flange Knuckle joint pin Page
Head side flange Clevis pin 309
Series MB 쏔Q 80 Single clevis Single knuckle joint
Double knuckle joint
Double clevis Trunnion pivot bracket
Center trunnion Double clevis pivot bracket
(1)
∗ Standard

End lock
100 Basic
Axial foot
Rod end nut
Locking release bolt
(N only) Page
D-쏔
Rod side flange Option
Head side flange 315
Series MBB Knuckle joint pin
Single clevis
Double clevis
Clevis pin
Single knuckle joint -X쏔
Double knuckle joint
125 Center trunnion Trunnion pivot bracket
Double clevis pivot bracket Individual
-X쏔
∗ ø125 is not included in MBK, MB쏔Q and MBB.
Note 1) Standard stroke for MBK series is below 700. Technical
data
285
Combinations of Standard Products and Made
Series MB

Standard Series MB
Made to Order specifications (Standard)
Action/
Special product (Contact SMC for details.) Double acting
Type
Not available Single rod Double rod
Cushion
Air Rubber Air
Applicable
Symbol Specification bore size ø32 to ø100 ø125 ø32 to ø100 ø125 ø32 to ø100 ø125

Standard Standard

Long st Long stroke

D Built-in magnet

MB쏔-쏔 KJ With rod boot ø32 to ø125

10- Clean series

20- Copper and Fluorine-free

MB쏔 RV Water resistant

XA쏔 Change of rod end shape

XB5 Oversized rod cylinder

XB6 Heat-resistant cylinder (–10 to 150°C)

XB13 Low-speed cylinder (5 to 50 mm/s)

XC3 Special port position

XC4 With heavy duty scraper

XC5 Heat-resistant cylinder (–10 to 110°C)

XC6 Made of stainless steel

Tie-rod, cushion valve, tie-rod nut, etc.


XC7
made of stainless steel

XC8 Adjustable stroke cylinder/Adjustable extension type

XC9 Adjustable stroke cylinder/Adjustable retraction type

XC10 Dual stroke cylinder/Double rod type

XC11 Dual stroke cylinder/Single rod type ø32 to ø125

XC12 Tandem cylinder

XC14 Change of trunnion bracket mounting position

XC22 Fluororubber seal

Double clevis pins made of stainless


XC27
steel (Stainless steel 304)

Double knuckle joint


XC29
with spring pin

XC30 Rod side trunnion

XC35 With coil scraper

Fluororubber seal,
XC59
Built-in hard plastic magnet

XC65 XC6 + XC7 specifications

X1184 Cylinder with reed, heat-resistant switch


Note 1) Simple specials except XC14A and XC14B.
Note 2) XC10 specification for Series MBK is the non-rotating type on both sides. When the non-rotating type is applicable on one side, submit a special order request form.

286
to Order Specifications
Series MB

MB MBK MB쏔Q MBB


(Standard) (Non-rotating) (Low friction) (End lock)
Double acting
Double rod Single rod Double rod Single rod Single rod
Rubber Air Rubber Air Rubber — Air CJ1
ø32 to ø100 ø125 ø32 to ø100
CJP
CJ2
CM2
CG1
MB
MB1
CA2
CS1
CS2

Note 2) Note 2)

Note 1)

D-쏔
-X쏔
Individual
-X쏔
Technical
data
287
, , , grod
ing ing ing
l e act e rod l e act le rod l e act rotatin
ub Sing l ub Dou b ub Non -
Do Do Do

Series MB, MBW, MBK,


Increased kinetic
energy absorption
Elevated cushion volume and the adoption of a
Improved cushion capacity new cushion seal design permit about 30% more
“Floating” cushion seal design eliminates allowable kinetic energy over the CA1 series.
piston rod “bouncing” due to cracking In addition, service life of cushion seal is about 5
pressure at beginning of stroke. times greater.

Compact and
lightweight design
The square cover is made more compact than
the CA1 series. In addition, die cast covers yield
10 to 25% weight reduction over the CA1 series.

Accurate mounting
The cylinder cover and mounting bracket
with high dimensional accuracy simplifies
installation and extends service life.

Minimal rod deflection


Improved bushing and piston rod dimensional accuracy
achieves tighter clearances and reduced piston rod
deflection.

288
pe
ric tion c k ty
wf d lo
Lo En
ø32, ø40, ø50, ø63, ø80,
MB Q, MBB ø100, ø125

Easy adjustment of cushion valve CJ1


Adjustment of the cushion valve is made CJP
with a hex. wrench allowing for easy fine
Port adjustment. CJ2
The cushion valve is recessed in the cover.
CM2
CG1
MB
MB1
CA2
CS1
CS2

Compact type auto switches


can be fitted.

Compact type auto switch


Reed auto switch: D-A9쏔
Solid state auto switch: D-M9쏔
D-M9쏔W
Switch mounting bracket
A direct mounting type auto switch is secured
on the tie rod with a dedicated switch bracket.

Miniaturization Improved operability Auto switch


Reduces the amount the auto switch Auto switch mounting and adjustment of the mounting inventory control can be simplified.
protrudes from the cylinder. position can be made via the same direction. Auto switch inventory control in
Tie rod mounting Direct mounting Tie rod mounting type Direct mounting the field can be simplified
type auto switch type auto switch auto switch (Conventional) type auto switch
(Conventional)
because direct mounting type
Two directions One direction
auto switches are applicable to a
wide variety of cylinders.
Watchmaker's
Phillips head Screwdriver
Screwdriver D-쏔
Hexagon wrench
(Width across
flats: 2.5 mm) -X쏔
MDB쏔50
Individual
-X쏔
Technical
data
289
Air Cylinder: Single Rod

Series MB
ø32, ø40, ø50, ø63, ø80, ø100, ø125

How to Order

MB L 32 50
With auto switch MDB L 32 50 M9BW
With auto switch Made to Order
(Built-in magnet) For details, refer to page 291.

Mounting Number of
B Basic/Without bracket Bore size Auto switch auto switches
L Axial foot 32 32 mm Nil Without auto switch Nil 2
F Rod side flange 40 40 mm ∗ For applicable auto switches, S 1
refer to tha table below.
G Head side flange 50 50 mm 3 3
C Single clevis 63 63 mm Rod boot/Cushion n n
D Double clevis 80 80 mm Nil None
T Center trunnion 100 100 mm Rod boot J Nylon tarpaulin
125 125 mm K Heat resistant tarpaulin
Nil Both ends
Cushion
Port thread type N∗ None
Built-in Magnet Cylinder Model Nil Rc ∗ Model without air cushion is designed to include
TN NPT rubber bumpers. The overall length is longer than
If a built-in magnet cylinder without an the cylinder with air cushions because the
auto switch is required, there is no need TF G bumpers are attached to the both sides of the
to enter the symbol for the auto switch. piston as follows.
Cylinder stroke (mm) ø32, ø40: +6 mm, ø50, ø63: +8 mm,
(Example) MDBB40-100 Refer to page 291 for standard strokes. ø80, ø100: +10 mm, ø125: +12 mm

Applicable Auto Switch/Refer to pages 1263 to 1371 for further information on auto switches.
Indicator light

Load voltage Auto switch model Lead wire length (m)


Electrical Wiring Pre-wired Applicable
Type Special function entry Tie-rod Band 0.5 1 3 5
(Output) DC AC connector load
mounting mounting (Nil) (M) (L) (Z)
3-wire (NPN) M9N —
5 V, 12 V IC circuit
3-wire (PNP) 24 V — M9P —
Grommet
12 V M9B —
— 2-wire
— — 100 V, 200 V J51 —

Solid state switch

Terminal 3-wire (NPN) 5 V, 12 V — G39


conduit 2-wire 12 V — K39
3-wire (NPN) M9NW — Relay,
Diagnostic indication Yes 5 V, 12 V IC circuit
3-wire (PNP) M9PW — PLC
(2-color indication)
2-wire 12V M9BW — —
24 V —
3-wire (NPN) M9NA —
Water resistant Grommet 5 V, 12 V IC circuit
(2-color indication) 3-wire (PNP) M9PA —
2-wire 12 V M9BA — —
Diagnostic output (2-color indication) 4-wire (NPN) 5 V, 12 V F59F — IC circuit
Magnetic field resistant (2-color indication) 2-wire (Non-polar) — P4DW — —
3-wire
— 5V — A96 — IC circuit —
Yes (Equiv. to NPN)
100 V A93 — —
Grommet
No 100 V or less A90 — IC circuit
Reed switch

Relay,
— Yes 100 V, 200 V A54 —
PLC
No 12 V 200 V or less A64 —
Terminal 2-wire 24 V — — A33
conduit — A34 — PLC
Yes 100 V, 200 V
DIN terminal — A44
Relay,
Diagnostic indication PLC
(2-color indication)
Grommet — — A59W —

∗ Lead wire length symbols: 0.5 m ········ Nil (Example) M9NW ∗ Solid state auto switches marked with a “쑗” are produced upon receipt of order.
1 m ········· M (Example) M9NWM
3 m ········· L (Example) M9NWL
5 m ········· Z (Example) M9NWZ
∗ Besides the above models, there are some other auto switches that are applicable. For detailed information, please refer to page 327.
∗ Solid state auto switches are also available with a pre-wired connector. Refer to pages 1328 and 1329 for details.
∗ D-A9쏔/M9쏔/M9쏔W/M9쏔AL auto switches are shipped together (not assembled). (However, auto switch mounting brackets are assembled when being shipped.)
290
Air Cylinder: Single Rod Series MB

Specifications
Bore size (mm) 32 40 50 63 80 100 125
Action Double acting, Single rod
Fluid Air
Proof pressure 1.5 MPa
Max. operating pressure 1.0 MPa
Min. operating pressure 0.05 MPa
Without auto switch: –10 to 70°C (No freezing) CJ1
Ambient and fluid temperature
With auto switch: –10 to 60°C (No freezing)

Lubrication Not required (Non-lube) CJP


50 to
Operating piston speed 50 to 1000 mm/s
Allowable stroke tolerance up to 250: +1.0 , 251 to 1000: +1.4 ,1001 to 1500: +1.8
700 mm/s
CJ2
0 0 0
Cushion Note 1) Both ends (Air cushion)
CM2
Port size (Rc, NPT, G) 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2

JIS Symbol Mounting


Basic, Foot, Rod side flange, Head side flange, CG1
Double acting Single clevis, Double clevis, Center trunnion
Note 1) When requesting a cylinder without air cushion, cylinder utilizes rubber bumpers which MB
increases cylinders overall length.
MB1
Standard Stroke
Bore
Standard stroke (mm)
Max. CA2
(mm) stroke
Made to Order Specifications
(For details, refer to pages 1373 32 25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500 700 CS1
to 1498 and 1515.) 40 25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500 800
Symbol Specifications 50 25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600 1000 CS2
-XA쏔 Change of rod end shape 63 25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600 1000
-XB5 Oversized rod cylinder 80 25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600, 700, 800 1000
-XB6 Heat resistant cylinder (150°C) 100 25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600, 700, 800 1000
-XB13 Low speed cylinder (5 to 50 mm/s)
125 25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600, 700, 800,1000 1400
-XC3 Special port position Intermediate strokes are available. (No spacer is used.)
-XC4 With heavy duty scraper
-XC5 Heat resistant cylinder (110°C)
-XC6 Piston rod and rod end nut made of stainless steel Accessory
Tie rod, cushion valve, tie rod nut, etc. Rod side Head side Single Double Center
-XC7 Mounting Basic Foot
made of stainless steel flange flange clevis clevis trunnion
-XC8 Adjustable stroke cylinder/Adjustable extend stroke Rod end nut
-XC9 Adjustable stroke cylinder/Adjustable retract stroke Standard
Clevis pin — — — — — —
-XC10 Dual stroke cylinder/Double rod
Single knuckle joint
-XC11 Dual stroke cylinder/Single rod
Double knuckle joint
-XC12 Tandem cylinder Option
(with pin)
-XC14 Change of trunnion bracket mounting position
-XC22 Fluororubber seals Rod boot
Double clevis pin and double knuckle
-XC27
pin made of stainless steel
-XC29 Double knuckle joint with spring pin
Material of Rod Boot
-XC30 Rod side trunnion Symbol Material Max. ambient temp.
-XC35 With coil scraper J Nylon tarpaulin 70°C
-XC59 Fluororubber seal, Built-in hard plastic magnet K Heat resistant tarpaulin 110°C∗
-XC65 XC6 + XC7 specifications ∗ Max. ambient temperature for rod boot itself.
-X1184 Cylinder with reed, heat-resistant switch

Mounting Bracket Part No.


Refer to pages 322 and 327 for cylinders Bore size
32 40 50 63 80 100 125
with auto switches. (mm)

• Minimum stroke for auto switch mounting Foot Note 1) MB-L03 MB-L04 MB-L05 MB-L06 MB-L08 MB-L10 MB-L12 D-쏔
• Proper auto switch mounting position Flange MB-F03 MB-F04 MB-F05 MB-F06 MB-F08 MB-F10 MB-F12
(detection at stroke end) and mounting Single clevis MB-C03 MB-C04 MB-C05 MB-C06 MB-C08 MB-C10 MB-C12 -X쏔
height Double clevis MB-D03 MB-D04 MB-D05 MB-D06 MB-D08 MB-D10 MB-D12
• Operating range Individual
Note 1) Two foot brackets required for one cylinder.
• Switch mounting bracket: Part no. -X쏔
Note 2) Accessories for each mounting bracket are as follows:
Foot, flange, single clevis/body mounting bolt, double clevis/body mounting bolt, clevis pins, Technical
flat washer and cotter pins. → Refer to page 298 for details. data
291
Series MB

Theoretical Force (Unit: N) OUT IN Allowable Kinetic Energy


Bore size Rod diameter Operating Piston area Operating pressure (MPa) 2000
ø125
(mm) (mm) direction (mm2) 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0
1000 ø100
OUT 804 161 241 322 402 482 563 643 724 804
32 12
IN 691 138 207 276 346 415 484 553 622 691 ø80
500
OUT 1257 251 377 503 629 754 880 1006 1131 1257 400 ø63
40 16 300
IN 1056 211 317 422 528 634 739 845 950 1056
200 ø50
OUT 1963 393 589 785 982 1178 1374 1570 1767 1963
50 20 ø40
IN 1649 330 495 660 825 989 1154 1319 1484 1649
100 ø32
OUT 3117 623 935 1247 1559 1870 2182 2494 2805 3117
63 20
IN 2803 561 841 1121 1402 1682 1962 2242 2523 2803

Load mass (kg)


50
OUT 5027 1005 1508 2011 2514 3016 3519 4022 4524 5027 40
80 25
IN 4536 907 1361 1814 2268 2722 3175 3629 4082 4536 30
OUT 7854 1571 2356 3142 3927 4712 5498 6283 7069 7854 20
100 30
IN 7147 1429 2144 2859 3574 4288 5003 5718 6432 7147
OUT 12272 2454 3682 4909 6136 7363 8590 9818 11045 12272 10
125 32
IN 11468 2294 3440 4588 5734 6881 8028 9174 10321 11468
Note) Theoretical force (N) = Pressure (MPa) x Piston area (mm2) 5
4
3

Mass/Aluminum Tube (kg)


2

Bore size (mm) 32 40 50 63 80 100 125


1
Basic 0.50 0.69 1.19 1.47 2.73 3.70 5.48

50

0
0
0

00
10

20

30
40
50

10
Foot 0.62 0.83 1.41 1.75 3.23 4.36 7.56
Flange 0.79 1.06 1.64 2.26 4.18 7.01 9.64 Max. acting speed (mm/s)
Basic mass
Single clevis 0.75 0.92 1.53 2.10 3.84 6.87 8.05
Example: Load limit at rod end when air cylinder
Double clevis 0.76 0.96 1.62 2.26 4.13 7.39 8.25
ø63 is actuated with max. actuating
Trunnion 0.79 1.05 1.67 2.27 4.28 7.37 8.46 speed 500 mm/s. See the intersection
Additional mass per of lateral axis 500 mm/s and ø63 line,
All mounting bracket 0.11 0.16 0.26 0.27 0.42 0.56 0.71 and extend the intersection to left.
each 50 mm stroke
Thus the allowable load is 80 kg.
Single knuckle joint 0.15 0.23 0.26 0.26 0.60 0.83 1.10
Accessory
Double knuckle joint (with pin) 0.22 0.37 0.43 0.43 0.87 1.27 0.91
Calculation example: MBB32-100 (Basic, ø32, 100 st)
• Basic mass ············ 0.50 (Basic, ø32)
• Additional mass ····· 0.11/50 stroke
• Cylinder stroke ······ 100 stroke
0.50 + 0.11 x 100/50 = 0.72 kg

292
Air Cylinder: Single Rod Series MB

Construction

!3r!5u q yet!6 !9 !2!8!4w !7 i o

CJ1
CJP
CJ2
CM2
CG1
!1!0
MB
MB1
CA2
CS1

MB125
CS2

Component Parts
No. Description Material Note No. Description Material Note
q Rod cover Aluminum die-cast Metallic painted !4 ∗ Cushion seal Urethane
w Head cover Aluminum die-cast Metallic painted !5 ∗ Rod seal NBR
e Cylinder tube Aluminum alloy Hard anodized !6 ∗ Piston seal NBR
r Piston rod Carbon steel Hard chrome plated !7 Cushion valve seal NBR
t Piston Aluminum alloy Chromated !8 ∗ Cylinder tube gasket NBR
y Cushion ring Brass !9 Piston gasket NBR
u Bushing Lead bronze cast
i Cushion ring Steel wire Nickel plated Copper/Fluorine-free
o Retaining ring Steel for spring ø40 to ø100
!0 Tie rod Carbon steel Zinc chromated 20 MB Mounting bracket Bore size Port thread type Stroke Suffix
!1 Tie rod nut Carbon steel Nickel plated
!2 Wear ring Resin Copper/Fluorine-free
!3 Rod end nut Carbon steel Nickel plated
Copper material has been replaced with non-copper material to
Replacement Parts/Seal Kit prevent generation of copper ions. This is to eliminate influence of
copper ions and fluororesin upon color CRT.
Bore size (mm) Kit no. Contents

32 MB32-PS
40 MB40-PS
Specifications
50 MB50-PS Set of the
No. !4, !5, !6 and !8 Action Double acting single rod
63 MB63-PS
80 MB80-PS Bore size ø32, ø40, ø50, ø63, ø80, ø100
100 MB100-PS Max. operating pressure 1.0 MPa
125 MB125-PS
Min. operating pressure 0.05 MPa
∗ Seal kits consist of items !4, !5, !6 and !8, and can be ordered by using
the seal kit number corresponding to each bore size. Cushion Air cushion ∗
∗ Trunnion type should not be disassembled. (Refer to page 328.) Piping Screw-in piping
∗ Seal kit includes a grease pack (ø32 to 50: 10 g, ø63, 80: 20 g, ø100,
125: 30 g). Operating piston speed 50 to 1000 mm/s
Order with the following part number when only the grease pack is needed. Basic, Axial foot, Rod side flange,
Grease pack part number: GR-S-010 (10 g), GR-S-020 (20 g) Mounting bracket Head side flange, Single clevis, Double clevis, D-쏔
Center trunnion
Water Resistant Air Cylinder -X쏔
∗ Auto switch capable.
Water resistant air cylinders are also available in Series MB, which are The cylinder should be operated within its allowable kinetic energy.
suitable for use on machine tools, where exposure to coolant is possible Individual
(Refer to page 292.)
and applicable for food machinery and automobile washing equipment -X쏔
∗ In case of types with no air cushion, a rubber bumper is used.
in an environment where water splashes. Please refer to page 899 for Technical
more information. data
293
Series MB

Without Mounting Bracket


Cushion valve
Basic: (B) G G WV
MM 2xP Port
With rod boot

øD
øE
øe

C
B
ød

H1
Effective MB
10.2 thread MA 2x4xJ C
10.2 l f A K F N N B
h H S + Stroke
ZZ + Stroke

Bore size Stroke range Effective Width


(mm) (mm) thread length across A B C D Ee11 F G H1 H MA MB J K MM N P S∗ V W ZZ∗
flats
32 to 500 19.5 10 22 46 32.5 12 30 13 13 6 47 16 4 M6 x 1 6 M10 x 1.25 27 1/8 84 4 6.5 135
40 to 500 27 14 30 52 38 16 35 13 14 8 51 16 4 M6 x 1 6 M14 x 1.5 27 1/4 84 4 9 139
50 to 600 32 18 35 65 46.5 20 40 14 15.5 11 58 16 5 M8 x 1.25 7 M18 x 1.5 31.5 1/4 94 5 10.5 156
63 to 600 32 18 35 75 56.5 20 45 14 16.5 11 58 16 5 M8 x 1.25 7 M18 x 1.5 31.5 3/8 94 9 12 156
80 to 800 37 22 40 95 72 25 45 20 19 13 72 16 5 M10 x 1.5 10 M22 x 1.5 38 3/8 114 11.5 14 190
100 to 800 37 26 40 114 89 30 55 20 19 16 72 16 5 M10 x 1.5 10 M26 x 1.5 38 1/2 114 17 15 190
125 to 1000 50 27 54 136 110 32 60 27 19 16 97 20 6 M12 x 1.75 13 M27 x 2 38 1/2 120 17 15 223

With Rod Boot (mm)


Bore size l
(mm) d e f
1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 300 301 to 400 401 to 500 501 to 600 601 to 700 701 to 800 801 to 900 901 to 1000
32 54 36 23 12.5 25 37.5 50 75 100 125 — — — — —
40 56 41 23 12.5 25 37.5 50 75 100 125 — — — — —
50 64 51 25 12.5 25 37.5 50 75 100 125 150 — — — —
63 64 51 25 12.5 25 37.5 50 75 100 125 150 — — — —
80 68 56 29 12.5 25 37.5 50 75 100 125 150 175 200 — —
100 76 61 29 12.5 25 37.5 50 75 100 125 150 175 200 — —
125 82 75 27 10 20 30 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200
(mm)
Bore size h
(mm) 1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 300 301 to 400 401 to 500 501 to 600 601 to 700 701 to 800 801 to 900 901 to 1000
32 73 86 98 111 136 161 186 — — — — —
40 81 94 106 119 144 169 194 — — — — —
50 89 102 114 127 152 177 202 227 — — — —
63 89 102 114 127 152 177 202 227 — — — —
80 101 114 126 139 164 189 214 239 264 289
100 101 114 126 139 164 189 214 239 264 289 — —
125 120 130 140 150 170 190 210 230 250 270 290 310

Without Air Cushion


Bore size
(mm)
S ZZ
32 90 141
40 90 145
50 102 164
63 102 164
∗ Model without air cushion is designed to include rubber bumpers. The overall length is longer than
the cylinder with air cushion as follows because the bumpers are attached to the both sides of the 80 124 200
piston; 100 124 200
ø32, ø40: +6 mm, ø50, ø63: +8 mm, ø80, ø100: +10 mm, ø125: +12 mm 125 132 235

294
Air Cylinder: Single Rod Series MB

With Mounting Bracket ∗ Refer to Basic (B) for other dimensions and with rod boot.

RZ
Foot: (L)
Cushion valve Port

RY

LY
4 x øLD

LH
CJ1
RT
X X CJP
LT

LX
Y LS + Stroke Y
LZ
ZZ + Stroke CJ2
Foot (mm) Without Air Cushion CM2
Bore size Stroke X ∗ ∗ Bore size
Y LD LH LS LT LX LY LZ RT RY RZ ZZ LS ZZ
(mm) range (mm)
32 to 700 22 9 7 30 128 3.2 32 53 50 — — —162 32 134 168
CG1
40 to 800 24 11 9 33 132 3.2 38 59 55 — — —170 40 138 176
∗ Model without air cushion is designed to include rubber 50 to 1000 27 11 9 40 148 3.2 46 72.5 70 — — —190 50 156 198 MB
bumpers. The overall length is longer than the cylinder
with air cushion as follows because the bumpers are
63 to 1000 27 14 12 45 148 3.6 56 82.5 80 — — —193 63 156 201
attached to the both sides of the piston; 80 to 1000 30 14 12 55 174 4.5 72 102.5 100 — — —230 80 184 240 MB1
ø32, ø40: +6 mm, ø50, ø63: +8 mm, ø80, ø100: +10 100 to 1000 32 16 14 65 178 4.5 89 122 120 — — —234 100 188 244
mm, ø125: +12 mm 125 125
to 1400 45 20 14 81 210 8 90 149 136 50 148 160 282 222 294
CA2
Rod side flange: (F) Cushion valve Port CS1
CS2
øFd

RY

FB
FY
FE FT RT RZ
FX
FZ

Rod Side Flange Without Air Cushion


Bore size Stroke Bore size
(mm) range FB FD FE FT FX FY FZ Fd RT RY RZ (mm) ZZ
32 to 700 50 7 3 10 64 32 79 25 — — — 32 147
40 to 800 55 9 3 10 72 36 90 31 — — — 40 151
50 to 1000 70 9 2 12 90 45 110 38.5 — — — 50, 63 172
63 to 1000 80 9 2 12 100 50 120 39.5 — — — 80, 100 212
80 to 1000 100 12 4 16 126 63 153 45 — — — 125 249
100 to 1000 120 14 4 16 150 75 178 54 — — —
125 to 1400 138 14 7 20 180 102 216 57.5 50 148 160

Head side flange: (G) Cushion valve


Port
4 x øFD
FB
FY

FT
ZZ + Stroke FX
FZ

Head Side Flange Without Air Cushion


Bore size Stroke Bore size
(mm) range FB FD FT FX FY FZ ZZ ∗
(mm) ZZ D-쏔
32 to 500 50 7 10 64 32 79 141 32 147
∗ Rod/Head side flange
Model without air cushion is designed to include rubber
40 to 500 55 9 10 72 36 90 145 40 151 -X쏔
50 to 600 70 9 12 90 45 110 164 50, 63 172
bumpers. The overall length is longer than the cylinder Individual
with air cushion as follows because the bumpers are 63 to 600 80 9 12 100 50 120 164 80, 100 212
80 to 800 100 12 16 126 63 153 202 125 249
-X쏔
attached to the both sides of the piston;
ø32, ø40: +6 mm, ø50, ø63: +8 mm, ø80, ø100: +10 100 to 800 120 14 16 150 75 178 202 Technical
mm, ø125: +12 mm 125 to 1000 138 14 20 180 102 216 237 data
295
Series MB

With Mounting Bracket ∗ Refer to Basic (B) for other dimensions and with rod boot.

Single clevis: (C) Cushion valve Port


CDH10

U
L CX
Z + Stroke RR
ZZ + Stroke

Single Clevis Without Air Cushion


Bore size Stroke ∗ ∗ Bore size
(mm) range L RR U CDH10 CX —0.1
—0.3 Z ZZ (mm) Z ZZ
32 to 500 23 10.5 13 10 14 154 164.5 32 160 170.5
∗ Single clevis 40 to 500 23 11 13 10 14 158 169 40 164 175
Model without air cushion is designed to include rubber 50 to 600 30 15 17 14 20 182 197 50, 63 190 205
bumpers. The overall length is longer than the cylinder with
air cushion as follows because the bumpers are attached to 63 to 600 30 15 17 14 20 182 197 80, 100 238 261
the both sides of the piston; 80 to 800 42 23 26 22 30 228 251 125 279 307
ø32, ø40: +6 mm, ø50, ø63: +8 mm, ø80, ø100: +10 mm, 100 to 800 42 23 26 22 30 228 251
ø125: +12 mm 125 to 1000 50 28 30 25 32 267 295

Double clevis: (D) Cushion valve Port


CDH10

U
L CX
Z + Stroke RR
CZ
ZZ + Stroke

Double Clevis Without Air Cushion


Bore size Stroke H10 +0.3 ∗ ∗ Bore size
(mm) range L RR U CD CX +0.1 CZ Z ZZ (mm) Z ZZ
32 to 500 23 10.5 13 10 14 28 154 164.5 32 160 170.5
∗ Double clevis 40 to 500 23 11 13 10 14 28 158 169 40 164 175
Model without air cushion is designed to include rubber 50 to 600 30 15 17 14 20 40 182 197 50, 63 190 205
bumpers. The overall length is longer than the cylinder with
air cushion as follows because the bumpers are attached to 63 to 600 30 15 17 14 20 40 182 197 80, 100 238 261
the both sides of the piston; 80 to 800 42 23 26 22 30 60 228 251 125 279 307
ø32, ø40: +6 mm, ø50, ø63: +8 mm, ø80, ø100: +10 mm, 100 to 800 42 23 26 22 30 60 228 251
ø125: +12 mm 125 to 1000 50 28 30 25 32 64 267 295

Center trunnion: (T)


Z + 1/2 Stroke Cushion valve Port
øTDe8
TY

TX
TT
TZ

Center Trunnion Without Air Cushion


Bore size Stroke Bore size
(mm) range TDe8 TT TX TY TZ Z∗∗ (mm) Z
32 to 500 12 17 50 49 74 89 32 92
∗∗ Center trunnion 40 to 500 16 22 63 58 95 93 40 96
Model without air cushion is designed to include rubber 50 to 600 16 22 75 71 107 105
bumpers. The overall length is longer than the cylinder with air
50, 63 109
cushion as follows because the bumpers are attached to the 63 to 600 20 28 90 87 130 105 80, 100 134
both sides of the piston; 80 to 800 20 34 110 110 150 129 125 163
ø32, ø40: +3 mm, ø50, ø63: +4 mm, 100 to 800 25 40 132 136 182 129
ø80, ø100: +5 mm, ø125: +6 mm 125 to 1000 25 50 160 160 210 157

296
Air Cylinder: Single Rod Series MB

Trunnion/Double Clevis Pivot Bracket

Part No.
Cylinder model
MB쏔32 MB쏔40 MB쏔50 MB쏔63 MB쏔80 MB쏔100 MB쏔125
Description
Trunnion pivot bracket Note 1) MB-S03 MB-S04 MB-S06 MB-S10 MB-S12
Double clevis pivot bracket MB-B03 MB-B05 MB-B08 MB-B12
Note 1) When ordering a trunnion pivot bracket, order 2 pcs. for 1 cylinder. CJ1
Trunnion pivot bracket TE
Z + 1/2 Stroke TO TX TO CJP
CJ2
CM2

TY
B
4 x øTT
CG1

øTD
TF
TH
MB

TS
4 x øTR
B MB1
TU TL TU TC
TA
CA2
(mm) Without Air Cushion
Part no.
Bore size
(mm) B TA TL TU TC TX TE TO TR TT TS TH TF Z∗∗ TDH10
Bore size
(mm) Z CS1
MB-S03 32 46 62 45 8.5 62 50 74 12 7 13 10 35 47 89 12 +0.070 32 92
CS2
0
40 52 80 60 10 80 63 97 17 9 17 12 45 60 93 16 +0.070
0 40 96
MB-S04
50 65 80 60 10 92 75 109 17 9 17 12 45 60 105 16 +0.070
0 50 109
+0.084
63 75 100 70 15 110 90 130 20 11 22 14 60 80 105 20 0 63 109
MB-S06
80 95 100 70 15 130 110 150 20 11 22 14 60 80 129 20 +0.084
0 80 134
MB-S10 100 114 120 90 15 158 132 184 26 13.5 24 17 75 100 129 25 +0.084
0 100 134
MB-S12 125 136 142 105 18.5 186 160 212 26 13.5 24 25 85 115 157 25 +0.084
0 125 163

Double clevis pivot bracket


B
Z + Stroke DB DX

B° DD
°
90
4 x øDT
B


DH

DS

DU DL DU 4 x øDR DO DC DO
DA DE

(mm) Without Air Cushion


Bore size ∗ Bore size
Part no. (mm) B DA DB DL DU DC DX DE DO DR DT DS DH Z DD H10 (mm)
Z
32 46 42 32 22 10 44 14 62 9 6.6 15 7 33 154 10 +0.058
0 32 160
MB-B03
40 52 42 32 22 10 44 14 62 9 6.6 15 7 33 158 10 +0.058
0 40 164
50 65 53 43 30 11.5 60 20 81 10.5 9 18 8 45 182 14 +0.070
0 50 190
MB-B05
63 75 53 43 30 11.5 60 20 81 10.5 9 18 8 45 182 14 +0.070
0 63 190
80 95 73 64 45 14 86 30 111 12.5 11 22 10 65 228 22 +0.084
0 80 238
MB-B08
100 114 73 64 45 14 86 30 111 12.5 11 22 10 65 228 22 +0.084
0 100 238
MB-B12 125 136 90 78 60 15 110 32 136 13 13.5 24 14 75 267 25 +0.084
0 125 279

Rotating Angle
∗∗ Trunnion pivot bracket D-쏔
Bore size
A° B° A° + B° + 90° Model without air cushion is designed to include rubber bumpers. The overall length is longer than the
(mm) cylinder with air cushion as follows because the bumpers are attached to the both sides of the piston;
32, 40 25° 45° 160° ø32, ø40: +3 mm, ø50, ø63: +4 mm, ø80, ø100: +5 mm, ø125: +6 mm -X쏔
50, 63 40° 60° 190° ∗ Mounting plate
Model without air cushion is designed to include rubber bumpers. The overall length is longer than the Individual
80, 100 30° 55° 175° cylinder with air cushion as follows because the bumpers are attached to the both sides of the piston; -X쏔
125 30° 50° 170° ø32, ø40: +6 mm, ø50, ø63: +8 mm, ø80, ø100: +10 mm, ø125: +12 mm
Technical
data
297
Series MB

Dimensions for Accessories


Rod end nut 30° Knuckle joint pin
d

øDd9
(Standard) Clevis pin 2 x ød

C
m l
H B L

Bore size Bore size (mm) d


Part no. d H B C D Part no. Dd9 L l m (Through Applicable cotter pin
(mm) Clevis Knuckle hole diameter)
–0.040
NT-03 32 M10 x 1.25 6 17 19.6 16.5 CD-M03Note 1) 32, 40 10 –0.076 44 36 4 3 ø3 x 18 l
–0.050
NT-04 40 M14 x 1.5 8 22 25.4 21 CD-M05Note 1) 50, 63 14 –0.093 60 51 4.5 4 ø4 x 25 l
–0.065
NT-05 50, 63 M18 x 1.5 11 27 31.2 26 CD-M08Note 1) 80, 100 22 –0.117 82 72 5 4 ø4 x 35 l
–0.065
NT-08 80 M22 x 1.5 13 32 37.0 31 IY-12 Note 2) 125 25 –0.117 79.5 69.5 5 4 ø4 x 40 l
NT-10 100 M26 x 1.5 16 41 47.3 39 Note 1) A cotter pin and a flat washer are equipped as standard. Note 2) Only pins are included when shipped.
NT-12M 125 M27 x 2 16 41 47.3 39 Y type
Double knuckle
I type

R
MM NDH10 joint
1

R
MM øNDH10
R

45°

1
Single knuckle
R
øE1

joint

øE1

NX
NZ
A1 U1
L1 U1
A NX
L1

Bore size Bore size


Part no. (mm) A A1 E1 L1 MM R1 U1 NDH10 NX Part no. (mm) E1 L1 MM R1 U1 NDH10 NX NZ
+0.058 –0.10 +0.058 +0.30
I-03M 32 40 14 20 30 M10 x 1.25 12 16 10 0 14 –0.30 Y-03MNote 1) 32 20 30 M10 x 1.25 10 16 10 0 14 +0.10 28 –0.10
–0.30
+0.058 –0.10 +0.058 +0.30
I-04M 40 50 19 22 40 M14 x 1.5 12.5 19 10 0 14 –0.30 Y-04MNote 1) 40 22 40 M14 x 1.5 11 19 10 0 14 +0.10 28 –0.10
–0.30
+0.070 –0.10 +0.070 +0.30
I-05M 50, 63 64 24 28 50 M18 x 1.5 16.5 24 14 0 20 –0.30 Y-05MNote 1) 50, 63 28 50 M18 x 1.5 14 24 14 0 20 +0.10 40 –0.10
–0.30
+0.084 –0.10 +0.084 +0.30
I-08M 80 80 26 40 60 M22 x 1.5 23.5 34 22 0 30 –0.30 Y-08MNote 1) 80 40 65 M22 x 1.5 20 34 22 0 30 +0.10 60 –0.10
–0.30
+0.084 –0.10 +0.084 +0.30
I-10M 100 80 26 40 60 M26 x 1.5 23.5 34 22 0 30 –0.30 Y-10MNote 1) 100 40 65 M26 x 1.5 20 34 22 0 30 +0.10 60 –0.10
–0.30
+0.084 –0.10 +0.084 +0.30
I-12M 125 119 36 46 92 M27 x 2.0 28.5 34 25 0 32 –0.30 Y-12MNote 2) 125 46 100 M27 x 2 27 42 25 0 32 +0.10 64 –0.10
–0.30

Note 1) A pin, cotter pin and a flat washer are equipped as standard. Note 2) A pin and a cotter pin are equipped as standard.

Combinations of Support Brackets


Available Combination························································왘 Refer to below picture together.
Bracket for Single Double Single Double Pivot
Bracket work
for cylinder clevis clevis knuckle joint knuckle joint bracket
Single clevis — q — w —
Double clevis e — r — o
Single knuckle joint — t — y —
Double knuckle joint u — i — !0

No. Appearance No. Appearance


Single clevis + Double clevis Single knuckle joint + Double knuckle joint

q y

Single clevis + Double knuckle joint Double knuckle joint + Single clevis

w u

Double clevis + Single clevis Double knuckle joint + Single knuckle joint

e i

Double clevis + Single knuckle joint Double clevis + Pivot bracket

r o

Single knuckle joint + Double clevis Double knuckle joint + Pivot bracket

t !0

298
Air Cylinder: Double Rod

Series MBW
ø32, ø40, ø50, ø63, ø80, ø100, ø125

How to Order CJ1


CJP
MBW L 32 150 CJ2
With auto switch MDBW L 32 150 M9BW CM2

With auto switch Number of auto switches CG1


(Built-in magnet) Nil 2
Mounting S 1 MB
Bore size Auto switch 3 3
B Basic/Without bracket
L Axial foot 32 32 mm Nil Without auto switch n n MB1
∗ For applicable auto switches,
F Rod side flange 40 40 mm Made to Order
refer to tha table below.
G Head side flange 50 50 mm
Rod boot/Cushion
For details, refer to page 300. CA2
C Single clevis 63 63 mm
80 80 mm Nil None
D
T
Double clevis
Center trunnion 100 100 mm J Nylon tarpaulin (one end) CS1
125 125 mm Rod boot JJ Nylon tarpaulin (both ends)
K Heat resistant tarpaulin (one end) CS2
Built-in Magnet Cylinder Model Port thread type KK Heat resistant tarpaulin (both ends)
If a built-in magnet cylinder without an Nil Rc — Both ends
Cushion
auto switch is required, there is no need TN NPT N∗ None
to enter the symbol for the auto switch. TF G ∗ Model without air cushion is designed to include rubber bumpers. The
overall length is longer than the cylinder with air cushions because the
(Example) MDBWB40-100 Cylinder stroke (mm) bumpers are attached to the both sides of the piston as follows.
Refer to page 300 for standard strokes. ø32, ø40: +6 mm, ø50, ø63: +8 mm,
ø80, ø100: +10 mm
Applicable Auto Switch/Refer to pages 1263 to 1371 for further information on auto switches.
Indicator light

Load voltage Auto switch model Lead wire length (m)


Electrical Wiring Pre-wired Applicable
Type Special function entry Tie-rod Band 0.5 1 3 5
(Output) DC AC connector load
mounting mounting (Nil) (M) (L) (Z)
3-wire (NPN) M9N —
5 V, 12 V IC circuit
3-wire (PNP) 24 V — M9P —
Grommet
12 V M9B —
— 2-wire
— — 100 V, 200 V J51 —

Solid state switch

Terminal 3-wire (NPN) 5 V, 12 V — G39


conduit 2-wire 12 V — K39
3-wire (NPN) M9NW — Relay,
Diagnostic indication Yes 5 V, 12 V IC circuit
3-wire (PNP) M9PW — PLC
(2-color indication)
2-wire 12V M9BW — —
24 V —
3-wire (NPN) M9NA —
Water resistant Grommet 5 V, 12 V IC circuit
(2-color indication) 3-wire (PNP) M9PA —
2-wire 12 V M9BA — —
Diagnostic output (2-color indication) 4-wire (NPN) 5 V, 12 V F59F — IC circuit
Magnetic field resistant (2-color indication) 2-wire (Non-polar) — P4DW — —
3-wire
— 5V — A96 — IC circuit —
Yes (Equiv. to NPN)
100 V A93 — —
Grommet
No 100 V or less A90 — IC circuit
Reed switch

Relay,
— Yes 100 V, 200 V A54 —
PLC
No 12 V 200 V or less A64 —
Terminal 2-wire 24 V — — A33
conduit — A34 — PLC
Yes 100 V, 200 V
DIN terminal — A44
Diagnostic indication
Relay, D-쏔
Grommet — — A59W — PLC
(2-color indication)
∗ Lead wire length symbols: 0.5 m ········ Nil (Example) M9NW ∗ Solid state auto switches marked with a “쑗” are produced upon receipt of order. -X쏔
1 m ········· M (Example) M9NWM
3 m ········· L (Example) M9NWL Individual
5 m ········· Z (Example) M9NWZ -X쏔
∗ Besides the above models, there are some other auto switches that are applicable. For detailed information, please refer to page 327.
Technical
∗ Solid state auto switches are also available with a pre-wired connector. Refer to pages 1328 and 1329 for details.
∗ D-A9쏔/M9쏔/M9쏔W/M9쏔AL auto switches are shipped together (not assembled). (However, auto switch mounting brackets are assembled when being shipped.) data
299
Series MBW

Specifications
Bore size (mm) 32 40 50 63 80 100 125
Action Double acting, Single rod
Fluid Air
Proof pressure 1.5 MPa
Max. operating pressure 1.0 MPa
Min. operating pressure 0.05 MPa
Without auto switch: –10 to 70°C (No freezing)
Ambient and fluid temperature
With auto switch: –10 to 60°C (No freezing)

Lubrication Not required (Non-lube)


50 to
Operating piston speed 50 to 1000 mm/s 700 mm/s
JIS Symbol Allowable stroke tolerance up to 250: +1.0
0
, 251 to 1000: +1.4
0
Double acting
Cushion Note) Both ends (Air cushion)
Port size (Rc, NPT, G) 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2
Mounting Basic, Foot, Flange, Center trunnion
Note) Absorbable kinetic energy by cushion mechanism is identical to double acting single rod.
In case of types with no air cushion, a rubber bumper is used.

Made to Order Specifications Accessory


(For details, refer to pages Center
1373 to 1498.) Mounting Basic Foot Flange
trunnion
Symbol Specifications Standard Rod end nut
-XA쏔 Change of rod end shape Single knuckle joint
-XB6 Heat resistant cylinder (150°C)
Option Double knuckle joint (with pin)
-XC3 Special port position
Rod boot
-XC4 With heavy duty scraper
-XC5 Heat resistant cylinder (110°C) OUT
Piston rod and rod end nut made of Theoretical Force (Unit: N) IN
-XC6
stainless steel Bore Rod dia. Operating Piston area Operating pressure (MPa)
Tie rod, cushion valve, tie rod nut, etc. (mm) (mm) direction (mm2) 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0
-XC7
made of stainless steel 32 12 IN/OUT 691 138 207 276 346 415 484 553 622 691
-XC14 Change of trunnion bracket mounting position 40 16 IN/OUT 1056 211 317 422 528 634 739 845 950 1056
-XC22 Fluororubber seals 50 20 IN/OUT 1649 330 495 660 825 989 1154 1319 1484 1649
-XC30 Rod side trunnion 63 20 IN/OUT 2803 561 841 1121 1402 1682 1962 2242 2523 2803
-XC35 With coil scraper 80 25 IN/OUT 4536 907 1361 1814 2268 2722 3175 3629 4082 4536
100 30 IN/OUT 7147 1429 2144 2859 3574 4288 5003 5718 6432 7147
125 32 IN/OUT 11468 2294 3440 4588 5734 6881 8028 9174 10321 11468
Note) Theoretical force (N) = Pressure (MPa) x Piston area (mm2)
Standard Stroke
Bore size
(mm)
Standard stroke (mm) Mass/Aluminum Tube (kg)
Bore size (mm) 32 40 50 63 80 100 125
25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200,
32 Basic 0.56 0.79 1.34 1.65 3.11 4.14 6.48
250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500
Foot 0.6 0.93 1.56 1.93 3.61 4.8 8.56
Basic mass
25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, Flange 0.85 1.16 1.79 2.44 4.56 7.45 10.64
40
250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500
Trunnion 0.85 1.15 1.82 2.45 4.66 7.81 9.46
25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, Add’l mass per each 50 mm stroke All mounting bracket 0.15 0.24 0.34 0.35 0.61 0.84 1.02
50
250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600 Single knuckle 0.15 0.23 0.26 0.26 0.60 0.83 1.10
Accessory
Double knuckle (with pin) 0.22 0.37 0.43 0.43 0.87 1.27 0.91
25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200,
63 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600 Calculation example: MBWB32-100 (Basic, ø32, 100 st)
• Basic mass ············· 0.56 (Basic, ø32)
25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 250, • Additional mass ······ 0.15/50 stroke
80 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600, 700, 800 • Cylinder stroke ······· 100 stroke
0.56 + 0.15 x 100/50 = 0.86 kg Refer to pages 322 and 327 for cylinders
25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 250, with auto switches.
100 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600, 700, 800
• Minimum stroke for auto switch mounting
125
25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 250, 300, Material of Rod Boot • Proper auto switch mounting position
350, 400, 450, 500, 600, 700, 800, 1000 (detection at stroke end) and mounting
Symbol Material Max. ambient temp.
height
Intermediate strokes are available. J Nylon tarpaulin 70°C
(No spacer is used) • Operating range
K Heat resistant tarpaulin 110°C∗ • Switch mounting bracket: Part no.
∗ Max. ambient temperature for rod boot itself.

300
Air Cylinder: Double Rod Series MBW

Mounting Bracket Part No.


Bore size (mm) 32 40 50 63 80 100 125
Foot MB-L03 MB-L04 MB-L05 MB-L06 MB-L08 MB-L10 MB-L12
Flange MB-F03 MB-F04 MB-F05 MB-F06 MB-F08 MB-F10 MB-F12
∗ Two foot brackets required for one cylinder.

Water Resistant Air Cylinder


Water resistant air cylinders are also available in Series MB, which are suitable CJ1
for use on machine tools in an atmosphere with coolant and applicable to food
machinery and automobile washing equipment in an environment with water
splashes. Please refer to page 899 for more information. CJP
CJ2
Copper/Fluorine-free CM2
20 MBW Mounting bracket Bore size Port thread type Stroke Suffix
CG1
Copper/Fluorine-free
MB
Copper material has been replaced with non-copper material to
prevent generation of copper ions. This is to eliminate influence of MB1
copper ions and fluororesin upon color CRT.
CA2
Specifications CS1
Action Double acting, Single rod
Bore size ø32, ø40, ø50, ø63, ø80, ø100 CS2
Max. operating pressure 1 MPa
Min. operating pressure 0.05 MPa
Cushion Air cushion∗
Piping Screw-in piping
Operating piston speed 50 to 1000 mm/s
Basic, Axial foot, Rod side flange,
Mounting bracket Head side flange, Single clevis, Double clevis,
Center trunnion
∗ Auto switch capable.
The cylinder should be operated within the allowable kinetic energy. (Refer to page 292.)
∗ In case of types with no air cushion, a rubber bumper is used.

D-쏔
-X쏔
Individual
-X쏔
Technical
data
301
Series MBW

Construction

!1e!3y q twr!4!8!7 !2 !6 iu!5

!0 o

MBW125

Component Parts
No. Description Material Note No. Description Material Note
q Rod cover Aluminum die-cast Metallic painted !2 ∗ Cushion seal Urethane
w Cylinder tube Aluminum alloy Hard anodized !3 ∗ Rod seal NBR
e Piston rod Carbon steel Hard chrome plated !4 ∗ Piston seal NBR
r Piston Aluminum alloy Chromated !5 Cushion valve seal NBR
t Cushion ring Resin !6 ∗ Cylinder tube gasket NBR
y Bushing Lead bronze cast !7 Piston gasket NBR
u Cushion valve Steel wire Nickel plated !8 Piston retainer Urethane
i Retaining ring Steel for spring ø40 to ø100
o Tie rod Carbon steel Zinc-chromated
!0 Tie rod nut Carbon steel Nickel plated
!1 Rod end nut Carbon steel Nickel plated

Replacement Parts: Seal Kit


Bore size (mm) Kit no. Contents
32 MBW32–PS
40 MBW40–PS
50 MBW50–PS
Set of the
63 MBW63–PS
No. !2, !3, !4 and !6.
80 MBW80–PS
100 MBW100–PS
125 MBW125–PS
∗ Seal kits consist of items !2, !3, !4 and !6, and can be ordered
by using the seal kit number corresponding to each bore size.
∗ Trunnion type should not be disassembled. (Refer to page 328.)
∗ Seal kit includes a grease pack (ø32 to 50: 10 g, ø63, 80: 20 g,
ø100, 125: 30 g).
Order with the following part number when only the grease pack is
needed.
Grease pack part number: GR-S-010 (10 g), GR-S-020 (20 g)

302
Air Cylinder: Double Rod Series MBW

With Mounting Bracket


Basic: (B)
MM
G 2xP G MM Port VW Cushion valve
øE

øD
øD
øe

C
B
H1
ød

H1
Effective Effective
thread MB thread
10.2
K F
MA 2x4xJ
C
B
CJ1
A N N F K A
10.2 l f H S + Stroke H + Stroke
h ZZ + 2 Stroke CJP

G 2xP G
CJ2
MM MM
With rod boot CM2
øD

øe
øe

CG1

ød
ød

Effective Effective
thread 10.2 10.2 thread
A K 10.2 l f N N f l + Stroke 10.2 K A MB
h S + Stroke h + Stroke
ZZ + 2 Stroke
MB1

Without CA2
Air Cushion
Bore Stroke Eff. thread Width CS1
(mm) range length across flats A B C D Ee11 F G H1 H MA MB J K MM N P S∗ V W ZZ∗ S ZZ
32 to 500 19.5 10 22 46 32.5 12 30 13 13 6 47 16 4 M6 x 1 6 M10 x 1.25 27 1/8 84 4 6.5 178 90 184 CS2
40 to 500 27 14 30 52 38 16 35 13 14 8 51 16 4 M6 x 1 6 M14 x 1.5 2 1/4 84 4 9 186 90 192
50 to 600 32 18 35 65 46.5 20 40 14 15.5 11 58 16 5 M8 x 1.25 7 M18 x 1.5 31.5 1/4 94 5 10.5 210 102 218
63 to 600 32 18 35 75 56.5 20 45 14 16.5 11 58 16 5 M8 x 1.25 7 M18 x 1.5 31.5 3/8 94 9 12 210 102 218
80 to 800 37 22 40 95 72 25 45 20 19 13 72 16 5 M10 x 1.5 10 M22 x 1.5 38 3/8 114 11.5 14 258 124 268
100 to 800 37 26 40 114 89 30 55 20 19 16 72 16 5 M10 x 1.5 10 M26 x 1.5 38 1/2 114 17 15 258 124 268
125 to 1000 50 27 54 136 110 32 60 27 19 16 97 20 6 M12 x 1.75 13 M27 x 2.0 38 1/2 120 17 15 314 132 326

With Rod Boot


l h
Bore
(mm) d e f 1 to 51 to 101 to 151 to 201 to 301 to 401 to 501 to 601 to 701 to 801 to 901 to 1 to 51 to 101 to 151 to 201 to 301 to 401 to 501 to 601 to 701 to 801 to 901 to
50 100 150 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 50 100 150 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000
32 54 36 23 12.5 25 37.5 50 75 100 125 — — — — — 73 86 98 111 136 161 186 — — — — —
40 56 41 23 12.5 25 37.5 50 75 100 125 — — — — — 81 94 106 119 144 169 194 — — — — —
50 64 51 25 12.5 25 37.5 50 75 100 125 150 — — — — 89 102 114 127 152 177 202 227 — — — —
63 64 51 25 12.5 25 37.5 50 75 100 125 150 — — — — 89 102 114 127 152 177 202 227 — — — —
80 68 56 29 12.5 25 37.5 50 75 100 125 150 175 200 — — 101 114 126 139 164 189 214 239 264 289 — —
100 76 61 29 12.5 25 37.5 50 75 100 125 150 175 200 — — 101 114 126 139 164 189 214 239 264 289 — —
125 82 75 27 10 20 30 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 120 130 140 150 170 190 210 230 250 270 290 310
Note) Dimension ZZ is with rod boot. (mm)
ZZ Note)
Bore
(mm) 1 to 51 to 101 to 151 to 201 to 301 to 401 to 501 to 601 to 701 to 801 to 901 to
50 100 150 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000
32 230 256 280 306 356 406 456 — — — — —
40 246 272 296 322 372 422 472 — — — — —
50 272 298 322 348 398 448 498 548 — — — —
63 272 298 322 348 398 448 498 548 — — — —
80 316 342 366 392 442 492 542 592 642 692 — —
100 316 342 366 392 442 492 542 592 642 692 — —
125 340 360 380 400 440 480 520 560 600 640 680 720

∗ Model without air cushion is designed to include rubber bumpers. The overall length is longer than
the cylinder with air cushion as follows because the bumpers are attached to the both sides of the D-쏔
piston;
ø32, ø40: +6 mm, ø50, ø63: +8 mm, ø80, ø100: +10 mm, ø125: +12 mm
-X쏔
Individual
-X쏔
Technical
data
303
Series MBW

With Mounting Bracket ∗ Refer to basic mounting (B) for other dimensions and with rod boot.
Port Cushion needle
Foot: (L)

LY
LH
4 x øLD
LT

Y X X Y
LX
LS + Stroke
LZ

Foot
LS∗ LT
Bore Stroke
(mm) range X Y LD LH LX LY LZ
32 to 500 22 9 7 30 128 3.2 32 53 50
40 to 500 24 11 9 33 132 3.2 38 59 55
50 to 600 27 11 9 40 148 3.2 46 72.5 70
63 to 600 27 14 12 45 148 3.6 56 82.5 80
80 to 800 30 14 12 55 174 4.5 72 102.5 100
100 to 800 32 16 14 65 178 4.5 89 122 120
125 to 1000 45 20 14 81 210 8 90 149 136

Port Cushion needle


Front flange: (F) 4 x øFD
ø Fd

FB
FY

FT FX
FZ

Front Flange
Bore Stroke
(mm) range FB FD FT FX FY FZ Fd
32 to 500 50 7 10 64 32 79 25
40 to 500 55 9 10 72 36 90 31
50 to 600 70 9 12 90 45 110 38.5
63 to 600 80 9 12 100 50 120 39.5
80 to 800 100 12 16 126 63 153 45
100 to 800 120 14 16 150 75 178 54
125 to 1000 138 14 20 180 102 216 57.5

Center trunnion: (T)


Z + 1/2 Stroke Port Cushion needle
øTDe8
TY

TX
TT TZ

Center Trunnion
Bore Stroke
(mm) range TDe8 TT TX TY TZ Z∗∗
∗ Model without air cushion is designed to include rubber bumpers. The overall length is longer
32 to 500 12 17 50 49 74 89
than the cylinder with air cushion as follows because the bumpers are attached to the both
sides of the piston; 40 to 500 16 22 63 58 95 93
ø32, ø40: +6 mm, ø50, ø63: +8 mm, ø80, ø100: +10 mm, ø125: +12 mm 50 to 600 16 22 75 71 107 105
∗∗ Model without air cushion is designed to include rubber bumpers. The overall length is longer 63 to 600 20 28 90 87 130 105
than the cylinder with air cushion as follows because the bumpers are attached to the both 80 to 800 20 34 110 110 150 129
sides of the piston; 100 to 800 25 40 132 136 182 129
ø32, ø40: +3 mm, ø50, ø63: +4 mm, ø80, ø100: +5 mm, ø125: +6 mm (For trunnion mounting)
125 to 1000 25 50 160 160 210 157
304
Air Cylinder: Non-rotating Rod Type

Series MBK
ø32, ø40, ø50, ø63, ø80, ø100

How to Order CJ1


CJP
MBK L 32 50 CJ2
With auto switch MDBK L 32 50 M9BW CM2

With auto switch Made to Order CG1


(Built-in magnet) For details, refer to page 306.

Mounting
Number of MB
Auto switch auto switches
B Basic/Without bracket Bore size Nil Without auto switch
L Axial foot 32 32 mm ∗ For applicable auto switches,
Nil 2 MB1
S 1
F Rod side flange 40 40 mm refer to tha table below.
3 3
G Head side flange 50 50 mm Rod boot/Cushion n n
CA2
C Single clevis 63 63 mm
Nil None
D Double clevis 80 80 mm
Rod boot J Nylon tarpaulin CS1
T Center trunnion 100 100 mm
K Heat resistant tarpaulin

Port thread type Cushion


Nil Both ends CS2
Built-in Magnet Cylinder Model N∗ None
Nil Rc ∗ Model without air cushion is designed to include
If a built-in magnet cylinder without an
TN NPT rubber bumpers. The overall length is longer than
auto switch is required, there is no need the cylinder with air cushions because the
to enter the symbol for the auto switch. TF G
bumpers are attached to the both sides of the
(Example) MDBKB40-100 piston as follows.
Cylinder stroke (mm) ø32, ø40: +6 mm, ø50, ø63: +8 mm,
Refer to page 306 for standard strokes. ø80, ø100: +10 mm, ø125: +12 mm
Applicable Auto Switch/Refer to pages 1263 to 1371 for further information on auto switches.
Indicator light

Load voltage Auto switch model Lead wire length (m)


Electrical Wiring Pre-wired Applicable
Type Special function entry Tie-rod Band 0.5 1 3 5
(Output) DC AC connector load
mounting mounting (Nil) (M) (L) (Z)
3-wire (NPN) M9N —
5 V, 12 V IC circuit
3-wire (PNP) 24 V — M9P —
Grommet
12 V M9B —
— 2-wire
— — 100 V, 200 V J51 —

Solid state switch

Terminal 3-wire (NPN) 5 V, 12 V — G39


conduit 2-wire 12 V — K39
3-wire (NPN) M9NW — Relay,
Diagnostic indication Yes 5 V, 12 V IC circuit
3-wire (PNP) M9PW — PLC
(2-color indication)
2-wire 12V M9BW — —
24 V —
3-wire (NPN) M9NA —
Water resistant Grommet 5 V, 12 V IC circuit
(2-color indication) 3-wire (PNP) M9PA —
2-wire 12 V M9BA — —
Diagnostic output (2-color indication) 4-wire (NPN) 5 V, 12 V F59F — IC circuit
Magnetic field resistant (2-color indication) 2-wire (Non-polar) — P4DW — —
3-wire
— 5V — A96 — IC circuit —
Yes (Equiv. to NPN)
100 V A93 — —
Grommet
No 100 V or less A90 — IC circuit
Reed switch

Relay,
— Yes 100 V, 200 V A54 —
PLC
No 12 V 200 V or less A64 —
Terminal 2-wire 24 V — — A33
conduit — A34 — PLC
Yes 100 V, 200 V
DIN terminal — A44
Diagnostic indication
Relay, D-쏔
Grommet — — A59W — PLC
(2-color indication)
∗ Lead wire length symbols: 0.5 m ········ Nil (Example) M9NW ∗ Solid state auto switches marked with a “쑗” are produced upon receipt of order. -X쏔
1 m ········· M (Example) M9NWM
3 m ········· L (Example) M9NWL Individual
5 m ········· Z (Example) M9NWZ -X쏔
∗ Besides the above models, there are some other auto switches that are applicable. For detailed information, please refer to page 327.
Technical
∗ Solid state auto switches are also available with a pre-wired connector. Refer to pages 1328 and 1329 for details.
∗ D-A9쏔/M9쏔/M9쏔W/M9쏔AL auto switches are shipped together (not assembled). (However, auto switch mounting brackets are assembled when being shipped.) data
305
Series MBK

Specifications
Bore size (mm) 32 40 50 63 80 100
Action Double acting, Single rod
Fluid Air
Proof pressure 1.5 MPa
Max. operating pressure 1.0 MPa
Min. operating pressure 0.05 MPa
Without auto switch: –10 to 70°C (No freezing)
Ambient and fluid temperature
With auto switch: –10 to 60°C (No freezing)

Lubrication Not required (Non-lube)


Operating piston speed 50 to 1000 mm/s
Allowable stroke tolerance up to 250: +1.0
0 , 251 to 1000: +1.4 +1.8
0 , 1001 to 1500: 0
Cushion Note 1) Both ends (Air cushion)
Port size (Rc, NPT, G) 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2
Basic, Foot, Rod side flange, Head side flange,
JIS Symbol Mounting
Single clevis, Double clevis, Center trunnion
Double acting
Non-rotating accuracy ±0.5° ±0.5° ±0.3°
Allowable rotating torque N·m max. 0.25 0.45 0.64 0.79 0.93
Note 1) Absorbable kinetic energy by cushion mechanism is identical to double acting single rod. When
requesting a cylinder without air cushion, cylinder utilizes rubber bumpers which increases
cylinders overall length.

Made to Order Specifications Accessory


(For details, refer to pages 1373
to 1498.) Rod side Head side Single Double Center
Mounting Basic Foot
flange flange clevis clevis trunnion
Symbol Specifications
Rod end nut
-XA쏔 Change of rod end shape Standard
Clevis pin — — — — — —
-XC3 Special port position
Single knuckle joint
-XC6 Piston rod and rod end nut made of stainless steel
Double knuckle joint
Tie rod, cushion valve, tie rod nut, Option
-XC7 (with pin)
etc. made of stainless steel
Rod boot
-XC8 Adjustable stroke cylinder/Adjustable extend stroke
-XC9 Adjustable stroke cylinder/Adjustable retract stroke
-XC10 Dual stroke cylinder/Double rod
Mass/Aluminum Tube (kg)
-XC14 Change of trunnion bracket mounting position
Bore size (mm) 32 40 50 63 80 100
Double clevis pin and double
-XC27 Basic 0.50 0.66 1.21 1.51 2.58 3.73
knuckle pin made of stainless steel
Foot 0.62 0.83 1.41 1.75 3.23 4.36
-XC30 Rod side trunnion Flange 0.79 1.03 1.64 2.30 4.03 7.04
Basic mass
Single clevis 0.75 0.89 1.55 2.14 3.69 6.90
Double clevis 0.76 0.93 1.64 2.30 3.98 7.42
Standard Stroke
Trunnion 0.79 1.02 1.69 2.31 4.13 7.40
Bore size Add’l mass per each 50 mm stroke All mounting bracket 0.11 0.15 0.26 0.27 0.40 0.52
Standard stroke (mm)
(mm)
Single knuckle 0.15 0.23 0.26 0.26 0.60 0.83
Accessory
25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, Double knuckle (with pin) 0.22 0.37 0.43 0.43 0.87 1.27
32
250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500 Calculation example: MBKB32-100 (Basic, ø32, 100 st)
쎲 Basic mass ············ 0.50 (Basic ø32)
25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 쎲 Additional mass ····· 0.11/50 stroke
40
250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500 쎲 Cylinder stroke ······ 100 stroke
0.50 + 0.11 x 100/50 = 0.72 kg
25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200,
50
250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600

25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, Refer to pages 322 and 327 for cylinders
63 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600 with auto switches.

25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 250, • Minimum stroke for auto switch mounting
80 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600, 700, 800 • Proper auto switch mounting position
(detection at stroke end) and mounting
25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 250, height
100 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600, 700, 800 • Operating range
Intermediate strokes are available. • Switch mounting bracket: Part no.
(No spacer is used)

306
Air Cylinder: Non-rotating Rod Type Series MBK

Material of Rod Boot Theoretical Force


Symbol Material Max. ambient temp. OUT side is identical to double acting single rod.
Refer to table below for IN side.
J Nylon tarpaulin 70°C
K Heat resistant tarpaulin 110°C ∗ Bore size Rod diameter Bore size Rod diameter
(mm) (mm2) (mm) (mm2)
∗ Max. ambient temperature for rod boot itself.
32 675 63 2804
40 1082 80 4568
50 1651 100 7223
Theoretical force (N) = CJ1
Pressure (MPa) x Piston area (mm2)
CJP
CJ2
Mounting Bracket Part No. CM2
Bore
32 40 50 63 80 100
size (mm)
CG1
Foot Note 1) MB-L03 MB-L04 MB-L05 MB-L06 MB-L08 MB-L10
Flange MB-F03 MB-F04 MB-F05 MB-F06 MB-F08 MB-F10 MB
Single clevis MB-C03 MB-C04 MB-C05 MB-C06 MB-C08 MB-C10
Double clevis MB-D03 MB-D04 MB-D05 MB-D06 MB-D08 MB-D10 MB1
Note 1) Two foot brackets required for one cylinder.
Note 2) Accessories for each mounting bracket are as follows:
Foot, flange, single clevis/body mounting bolt, double clevis/body mounting bolt, clevis pins, CA2
flat washer and cotter pins. → Refer to page 298 for details.
CS1
CS2

D-쏔
-X쏔
Individual
-X쏔
Technical
data
307
Series MBK

Construction
!0 o @1 !6!9!5i q r ye@3@0t!7 @2 !8 wu!4 !3

A only MBK32
A
across
Width

flats

Rod view A-A'


A'

!2 !1
Component Parts
No. Description Material Note No. Description Material Note
q Rod cover Aluminum die-cast Metallic painted !3 Piston nut Rolled steel
w Head cover Aluminum die-cast Metallic painted !4 Washer Steel wire
e Cylinder tube Aluminum alloy Hard anodized !5 Lock nut Steel wire
r Piston rod Stainless steel !6 Rod end nut Carbon steel Nickel plated
t Piston Aluminum alloy Chromated !7 Wear ring Resin
y Cushion ring A Rolled steel !8 ∗ Cushion seal Urethane
u Cushion ring B Rolled steel !9 ∗ Rod seal NBR
i Non-rotating guide bearing Oil-impregnated sintered alloy @0 ∗ Piston seal NBR
o Cushion valve Steel wire Nickel plated @1 Cushion valve seal NBR
!0 Retaining ring Steel for spring ø40 to ø100 @2 ∗ Cylinder tube gasket NBR
!1 Tie rod Carbon steel Zinc-chromated @3 Piston gasket NBR
!2 Tie rod nut Carbon steel Nickel plated

Replacement Parts/Seal Kit


Bore size
(mm) Kit no. Contents
∗ Seal kits consist of items !8, !9, @0 and @2, and can be ordered by
32 MBK32-PS using the seal kit number corresponding to each bore size.
40 MBK40-PS ∗ Seal kit includes a grease pack (ø32 to 50: 10 g, ø63, 80: 20 g,
50 MBK50-PS Set of the ø100, 125: 30 g).
63 MBK63-PS No. !8, !9, @0 and @2. Order with the following part number when only the grease pack is
80 MBK80-PS needed.
Grease pack part number: GR-S-010 (10 g), GR-S-020 (20 g)
100 MBK100-PS

∗ Model without air cushion is designed to include rubber bumpers. The overall length is longer than the cylinder with air cushion as follows
because the bumpers are attached to the both sides of the piston;
ø32, ø40: +6 mm, ø50, ø63: +8 mm, ø80, ø100: +10 mm

Without Mounting Bracket


Basic: (B) MM G 2xP G
Cushion valve
WV Port

øE
across
Width

B
C
flats

H1
Rod view Effective MB C
thread MA B
A F N 2x4xJ N
H S + Stroke
ZZ + Stroke
(mm)
Bore Stroke Effective Width
(mm) range thread length across flats A B C E F G H1 H MA MB J MM N P S∗ V W ZZ∗
32 up to 500 19.5 12.2 22 46 32.5 30 13 13 6 47 16 4 M6 x 1 M10 x 1.25 27 1/8 84 4 6.5 135
40 up to 500 27 14.2 30 52 38 35 13 14 8 51 16 4 M6 x 1 M14 x 1.5 27 1/4 84 4 9 139
50 up to 600 32 19 35 65 46.5 40 14 15.5 11 58 16 5 M8 x 1.25 M18 x 1.5 31.5 1/4 94 5 10.5 156
63 up to 600 32 19 35 75 56.5 45 14 16.5 11 58 16 5 M8 x 1.25 M18 x 1.5 31.5 3/8 94 9 12 156
80 up to 800 37 23 40 95 72 45 20 19 13 72 16 5 M10 x 1.5 M22 x 1.5 38 3/8 114 11.5 14 190
100 up to 800 37 27 40 114 89 55 20 19 16 72 16 5 M10 x 1.5 M26 x 1.5 38 1/2 114 17 15 190
Dimensions with mounting support is same as the basic style (Double acting single rod). Also dimensions with boot is same as the basic style (Double acting, Single rod).
308
Air Cylinder: Low Friction Type

Series MB쏔Q
ø32, ø40, ø50, ø63, ø80, ø100

How to Order CJ1


CJP
MB L Q 32 50 F CJ2
With auto switch MDB L Q 32 50 F M9BW CM2

With auto switch


Made to Order CG1
For details, refer to page 310.
(Built-in magnet)
Mounting Auto switch
MB
B Basic/Without bracket Nil Without auto switch
L Axial foot ∗ For applicable auto switches,
MB1
F Rod side flange refer to tha table below. Number of
G Head side flange auto switches CA2
C Single clevis Direction of low friction Nil 2
Double clevis F With pressure at head side S 1
D
T Center trunnion B With pressure at rod side 3 3
CS1
Bore size n n
Cylinder stroke (mm) CS2
32 32 mm Refer to page 310 for standard strokes.
Built-in Magnet Cylinder Model 40 40 mm
If a built-in magnet cylinder without an 50 50 mm Port thread type
auto switch is required, there is no need 63 63 mm Nil Rc
to enter the symbol for the auto switch. 80 80 mm TN NPT
(Example) MDBBQ40-100 100 100 mm TF G

Applicable Auto Switch/Refer to pages 1263 to 1371 for further information on auto switches.
Indicator light

Load voltage Auto switch model Lead wire length (m)


Electrical Wiring Pre-wired Applicable
Type Special function entry Tie-rod Band 0.5 1 3 5
(Output) DC AC connector load
mounting mounting (Nil) (M) (L) (Z)
3-wire (NPN) M9N —
5 V, 12 V IC circuit
3-wire (PNP) 24 V — M9P —
Grommet
12 V M9B —
— 2-wire
— — 100 V, 200 V J51 —

Solid state switch

Terminal 3-wire (NPN) 5 V, 12 V — G39


conduit 2-wire 12 V — K39
3-wire (NPN) M9NW — Relay,
Diagnostic indication Yes 5 V, 12 V IC circuit
3-wire (PNP) M9PW — PLC
(2-color indication)
2-wire 12V M9BW — —
24 V —
3-wire (NPN) M9NA —
Water resistant Grommet 5 V, 12 V IC circuit
(2-color indication) 3-wire (PNP) M9PA —
2-wire 12 V M9BA — —
Diagnostic output (2-color indication) 4-wire (NPN) 5 V, 12 V F59F — IC circuit
Magnetic field resistant (2-color indication) 2-wire (Non-polar) — P4DW — —
3-wire
— 5V — A96 — IC circuit —
Yes (Equiv. to NPN)
100 V A93 — —
Grommet
No 100 V or less A90 — IC circuit
Reed switch

Relay,
— Yes 100 V, 200 V A54 —
PLC
No 12 V 200 V or less A64 —
Terminal 2-wire 24 V — — A33
conduit — A34 — PLC
Yes 100 V, 200 V
DIN terminal — A44
Diagnostic indication
Relay, D-쏔
Grommet — — A59W — PLC
(2-color indication)
∗ Lead wire length symbols: 0.5 m ········ Nil (Example) M9NW ∗ Solid state auto switches marked with a “쑗” are produced upon receipt of order. -X쏔
1 m ········· M (Example) M9NWM
3 m ········· L (Example) M9NWL Individual
5 m ········· Z (Example) M9NWZ -X쏔
∗ Besides the above models, there are some other auto switches that are applicable. For detailed information, please refer to page 327.
Technical
∗ Solid state auto switches are also available with a pre-wired connector. Refer to pages 1328 and 1329 for details.
∗ D-A9쏔/M9쏔/M9쏔W/M9쏔AL auto switches are shipped together (not assembled). (However, auto switch mounting brackets are assembled when being shipped.) data
309
Series MB쏔Q

Specifications
Bore size (mm) 32 40 50 63 80 100
Action Double acting single rod
Direction of low friction One direction Note 1)
Fluid Air
Proof pressure 1.05 MPa
Max. operating pressure 0.7 MPa

Min. operating pressure 0.025 MPa 0.01 MPa


(ø32) (ø40 to ø100)

Ambient and fluid temperature Without auto switch: –10 to 70°C (No freezing)
With auto switch: –10 to 60°C (No freezing)
Lubrication Not required (Non-lube)
Cushion None
Port size (Rc, NPT, G) 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2

Mounting Basic, Foot, Rod side flange, Head side flange,


Single clevis, Double clevis, Center trunnion
Allowable leakage 0.5 l/min (ANR) or less
Note 1) Please refer to Selection Guide for the Low Friction Side.
JIS Symbol
Double acting
Standard Stroke
Bore size (mm) Standard stroke (mm)
32 25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500
40 25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500
Made to Order Specifications 50 25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600
(For details, refer to pages 1373
to 1498.) 63 25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600
80 25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600, 700, 800
Symbol Specifications
100 25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600, 700, 800
-XA쏔 Change of rod end shape
Intermediate strokes are available. (No spacer is used.)
-XC3 Special port position
-XC6 Piston rod and rod end nut made of stainless steel Accessory
Tie rod, cushion valve, tie rod nut,
-XC7 Rod side Head side Single Double Center
etc. made of stainless steel Mounting Basic Foot
flange flange clevis clevis trunnion
-XC14 Change of trunnion bracket mounting position
Rod end nut
Double clevis pin and double knuckle Standard
-XC27 Clevis pin — — — — — —
pin made of stainless steel
-XC29 Double knuckle joint with spring pin Single knuckle joint
-XC30 Rod side trunnion Option Double knuckle joint
(With pin)

Refer to pages 322 and 327 for cylinders


with auto switches. Mounting Bracket Part No.
• Minimum stroke for auto switch mounting Bore
• Proper auto switch mounting position size (mm) 32 40 50 63 80 100
(detection at stroke end) and mounting Note 1)
Foot MB-L03 MB-L04 MB-L05 MB-L06 MB-L08 MB-L10
height
• Operating range Flange MB-F03 MB-F04 MB-F05 MB-F06 MB-F08 MB-F10
• Switch mounting bracket: Part no. Single clevis MB-C03 MB-C04 MB-C05 MB-C06 MB-C08 MB-C10
Double clevis MB-D03 MB-D04 MB-D05 MB-D06 MB-D08 MB-D10
Note 1) Two foot brackets required for one cylinder.
Note 2) Accessories for each mounting bracket are as follows:
Foot, flange, single clevis/body mounting bolt, double clevis/body mounting bolt, clevis pins,
flat washer and cotter pins. → Refer to page 298 for details.

310
Air Cylinder: Low Friction Type Series MB쏔Q

Mass/Aluminum Tube (kg)


Bore size (mm) 32 40 50 63 80 100
Basic 0.50 0.69 1.19 1.47 2.73 3.7
Foot 0.68 0.93 1.56 1.93 3.61 4.8
Flange 0.79 1.06 1.64 2.26 4.18 7.01
Basic mass
Single clevis 0.75 0.92 1.53 2.1 3.84 6.87
Double clevis 0.76 0.96 1.62 2.26 4.13 7.39
Trunnion 0.79 1.05 1.67 2.27 4.28 7.37 CJ1
Additional mass
All mounting
per each 50 mm
stroke bracket
0.11 0.16 0.26 0.27 0.42 0.56 CJP
Single rod clevis 0.15 0.23 0.26 0.26 0.60 0.83
Accessory
CJ2
Double rod clevis 0.22 0.37 0.43 0.43 0.87 1.27
(with pin)
CM2
Calculation example: MBBQ32-100 (Basic, ø32, 100 st)
쎲 Basic mass ············ 0.50 (Basic, ø32)
쎲 Additional mass ····· 0.11/50 stroke CG1
쎲 Cylinder stroke ······ 100 stroke
0.50 + 0.11 x 100/50 = 0.72 kg
MB
MB1
Selection Guide for the Low Friction Side Application Example
CA2
1. When used as a balancer etc., follow the example of the application Low friction cylinder used in combination with precision regulator (Series IR)
mentioned earlier applying pressure at one port while leaving the other
port open to atmosphere. q w CS1
With pressure at rod cover port
Driving
·········· Low friction side B (Example of application q)
roller
Winding roller CS2
With pressure at head cover port
·········· Low friction side F (Example of application w) Precision regulator
In both cases, as long as the outside pressure moves the piston rod, low
friction can result in the direction of extension and retraction. f
Precision regulator

Sliding Resistance on Low Friction Side (Moving body)

0.025
(Converted into resistance for each cylinder)

Bore size ø32


0.02
Sliding resistance (MPa)

Caution on Use
ø40

ø50
ø63
Warning
1. In the direction of low friction operation, speed control
0.01 ø80
must be effected by the meter-in system.
ø100 With meter-out control, the exhaust pressure will increase and
create a greater sliding resistance.

0
0.01 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7

Operating pressure (MPa)

D-쏔
-X쏔
Individual
-X쏔
Technical
data
311
Series MB쏔Q

Construction

!2 r !4y q e !5 !3t!8 !1 !7 w !6 u i

!0 o

Component Parts
No. Description Material Note
q Rod cover Aluminum die-cast Metallic painted
w Head cover Aluminum die-cast Metallic painted
e Cylinder tube Aluminum alloy Hard anodized
r Piston rod Carbon steel Hard chrome plated
t Piston Aluminum alloy Chromated
y Bushing Lead bronze cast
u Cushion valve Steel wire Nickel plated
i Retaining ring Steel for spring ø40 to ø100
o Tie rod Carbon steel Zinc chromated
!0 Tie rod nut Carbon steel Nickel plated
!1 Wear ring Resin
!2 Rod end nut Carbon steel Nickel plated
!3 ∗ Back up O ring NBR
!4 ∗ Rod seal NBR
!5 ∗ Piston seal NBR
!6 Cushion valve seal NBR
!7 ∗ Cylinder tube gasket NBR
!8 Piston gasket NBR

Replacement Parts/Seal Kit


Bore (mm) Kit no. Contents
32 MBQ32-PS
40 MBQ40-PS
50 MBQ50-PS Set of the
63 MBQ63-PS No. !3, !4, !5 and !7
80 MBQ80-PS
100 MBQ100-PS
∗ Seal kits consist of items !3, !4, !5 and !7, and can be ordered by using the
seal kit number corresponding to each bore size.
∗ Trunnion type should not be disassembled. (Refer to page 328.)
∗ Since the seal kit does not include a grease pack, order it separately.
Grease pack part number: GR-L-020 (20 g)

312
Air Cylinder: Low Friction Type Series MB쏔Q

Basic: (B)

G G V
MM 2xP Port

CJ1
øD
øE

C
B
CJP
H1 CJ2
Effective MB
thread MA 2x4xJ C CM2
A K F N N B
CG1
H S + Stroke
ZZ + Stroke MB
MB1

(mm)
CA2
Bore Stroke Effective Width
(mm) range thread length across flats A B C D Ee11 F G H1 H MA MB J K MM N P S V ZZ CS1
32 up to 500 19.5 10 22 46 32.5 12 30 13 13 6 47 16 4 M6 x 1 6 M10 x 1.25 27 1/8 84 4 135
40 up to 500 27 14 30 52 38 16 35 13 14 8 51 16 4 M6 x 1 6 M14 x 1.5 27 1/4 84 4 139 CS2
50 up to 600 32 18 35 65 46.5 20 40 14 15.5 11 58 16 5 M8 x 1.25 7 M18 x 1.5 31.5 1/4 94 5 156
63 up to 600 32 18 35 75 56.5 20 45 14 16.5 11 58 16 5 M8 x 1.25 7 M18 x 1.5 31.5 3/8 94 9 156
80 up to 800 37 22 40 95 72 25 45 20 19 13 72 16 5 M10 x 1.5 10 M22 x 1.5 38 3/8 114 11.5 190
100 up to 800 37 26 40 114 89 30 55 20 19 16 72 16 5 M10 x 1.5 10 M26 x 1.5 38 1/2 114 17 190

With Mounting Bracket ∗ Refer to basic mounting (B) for other dimensions and with rod boot.

Foot: (L)
Port
LY
LH

4 x øLD
LT

Y X X Y
LX
LS + Stroke
LZ
ZZ + Stroke

Foot (mm)
Bore size Stroke X Y LD LH LS LT LX LY LZ ZZ
(mm) range
32 to 700 22 9 7 30 128 3.2 32 53 50 162
40 to 800 24 11 9 33 132 3.2 38 59 55 170 D-쏔
50 to 1000 27 11 9 40 148 3.2 46 72.5 70 190
63
80
to 1000
to 1000
27
30
14 12 45 148
14 12 55 174
3.6
4.5
56
72
82.5 80 193
102.5 100 230
-X쏔
100 to 1000 32 16 14 65 178 4.5 89 122 120 234 Individual
-X쏔
Technical
data
313
Series MB쏔Q

With Mounting Bracket

Front flange: (F) Front Flange (mm)


Port Bore size Stroke
(mm) range B FD FE FT FX FY FZ Fd
4 x øFD
32 to 700 50 7 3 10 64 32 79 25
40 to 800 55 9 3 10 72 36 90 31
øFd

FB
FY
50 to 1000 70 9 2 12 90 45 110 38.5
63 to 1000 80 9 2 12 100 50 120 39.5
80 to 1000 100 12 4 16 126 63 153 45
FE FX 100 to 1000 120 14 4 16 150 75 178 54
FT FZ

Rear flange: (G)


Port
4 x øFD
Rear Flange (mm)
Bore size Stroke
(mm) range B FD FT FX FY FZ ZZ
FB
FY

32 to 500 50 7 10 64 32 79 141
40 to 500 55 9 10 72 36 90 145
50 to 600 70 9 12 90 45 110 164
FT FX
63 to 600 80 9 12 100 50 120 164
ZZ + Stroke FZ 80 to 750 100 12 16 126 63 153 202
100 to 750 120 14 16 150 75 178 202

Single clevis: (C)


Port
CD H10 Single Clevis (mm)
Bore size Stroke
(mm) range L RR U CDH10 CX—0.1
—0.3 Z ZZ

32 to 500 23 10.5 13 10 14 154 164.5


40 to 500 23 11 13 10 14 158 169
U 50 to 600 30 15 17 14 20 182 197
CX 63 to 600 30 15 17 14 20 182 197
L
Z + Stroke RR 80 to 750 42 23 26 22 30 228 251
ZZ + Stroke 100 to 750 42 23 26 22 30 228 251

Double clevis: (D)


Port
CD H10 Double Clevis (mm)
Bore size Stroke H10
(mm) range L RR U CD CX +0.3
+0.1 CZ Z ZZ

32 to 500 23 10.5 13 10 14 28 154 164.5


40 to 500 23 11 13 10 14 28 158 169
U 50 to 600 30 15 17 14 20 40 182 197
CX
L 63 to 600 30 15 17 14 20 40 182 197
Z + Stroke RR CZ 80 to 750 42 23 26 22 30 60 228 251
ZZ + Stroke 100 to 750 42 23 26 22 30 60 228 251

Center trunnion: (T)

Z+1/2 Stroke
Port Center Trunnion (mm)
Bore size Stroke
(mm) range TDe8 TT TX TY TZ Z
øTDe8
TY

32 to 500 12 17 50 49 74 89
40 to 500 16 22 63 58 95 93
50 to 600 16 22 75 71 107 105
TT TX 63 to 600 20 28 90 87 130 105
TZ 80 to 750 20 34 110 110 150 129
100 to 750 25 40 132 136 182 129
314
Air Cylinder: With End Lock

Series MBB
ø32, ø40, ø50, ø63, ø80, ø100

How to Order CJ1


CJP
MBB L 32 50 H N CJ2
With auto switch MDBB L 32 50 H N M9BW CM2

With auto switch CG1


(Built-in magnet) Made to Order
Mounting For details, refer to page 316. MB
B Basic/Without bracket Bore size Manual release Number of
L Axial foot 32 32 mm N Non-locking
auto switches MB1
F Rod side flange 40 40 mm L Locking Nil 2
G Head side flange 50 50 mm S 1 CA2
C Single clevis 63 63 mm 3 3
Locking position
D Double clevis 80 80 mm n n CS1
T Center trunnion 100 100 mm H Locking at head end
R Locking at rod end Auto switch
Port thread type W Locking at both ends Nil Without auto switch CS2
Built-in Magnet Cylinder Model Nil Rc ∗ For applicable auto switches, refer to
tha table below.
If a built-in magnet cylinder without an TN NPT
Rod boot
auto switch is required, there is no need TF G
Nil None
to enter the symbol for the auto switch.
Cylinder stroke (mm) Rod boot J Nylon tarpaulin
(Example) MDBBB40-100
Refer to “Standard Stroke” on page 316. K Heat resistant tarpaulin

Applicable Auto Switch/Refer to pages 1263 to 1371 for further information on auto switches.
Indicator light

Load voltage Auto switch model Lead wire length (m)


Electrical Wiring Pre-wired Applicable
Type Special function entry Tie-rod Band 0.5 1 3 5
(Output) DC AC connector load
mounting mounting (Nil) (M) (L) (Z)
3-wire (NPN) M9N —
5 V, 12 V IC circuit
3-wire (PNP) 24 V — M9P —
Grommet
12 V M9B —
— 2-wire
— — 100 V, 200 V J51 —

Solid state switch

Terminal 3-wire (NPN) 5 V, 12 V — G39


conduit 2-wire 12 V — K39
3-wire (NPN) M9NW — Relay,
Diagnostic indication Yes 5 V, 12 V IC circuit
3-wire (PNP) M9PW — PLC
(2-color indication)
2-wire 12V M9BW — —
24 V —
3-wire (NPN) M9NA —
Water resistant Grommet 5 V, 12 V IC circuit
(2-color indication) 3-wire (PNP) M9PA —
2-wire 12 V M9BA — —
Diagnostic output (2-color indication) 4-wire (NPN) 5 V, 12 V F59F — IC circuit
Magnetic field resistant (2-color indication) 2-wire (Non-polar) — P4DW — —
3-wire
— 5V — A96 — IC circuit —
Yes (Equiv. to NPN)
100 V A93 — —
Grommet
No 100 V or less A90 — IC circuit
Reed switch

Relay,
— Yes 100 V, 200 V A54 —
PLC
No 12 V 200 V or less A64 —
Terminal 2-wire 24 V — — A33
conduit — A34 — PLC
Yes 100 V, 200 V
DIN terminal — A44
Diagnostic indication
Relay, D-쏔
Grommet — — A59W — PLC
(2-color indication)
∗ Lead wire length symbols: 0.5 m ········ Nil (Example) M9NW ∗ Solid state auto switches marked with a “쑗” are produced upon receipt of order. -X쏔
1 m ········· M (Example) M9NWM
3 m ········· L (Example) M9NWL Individual
5 m ········· Z (Example) M9NWZ -X쏔
∗ Besides the above models, there are some other auto switches that are applicable. For detailed information, please refer to page 327.
Technical
∗ Solid state auto switches are also available with a pre-wired connector. Refer to pages 1328 and 1329 for details.
∗ D-A9쏔/M9쏔/M9쏔W/M9쏔AL auto switches are shipped together (not assembled). (However, auto switch mounting brackets are assembled when being shipped.) data
315
Series MBB

Specifications
Bore size (mm) 32 40 50 63 80 100
Action Double acting, Single rod
Fluid Air
Proof pressure 1.5 MPa
Max. operating pressure 1.0 MPa
Min. operating pressure 0.15 MPa ∗
Without auto switch: –10 to 70°C (No freezing)
Ambient and fluid temperature With auto switch: –10 to 60°C (No freezing)

Lubrication Not required (Non-lube)


Operating piston speed 50 to 1000 mm/s
Allowable stroke tolerance up to 250: +1.0 +1.4 +1.8
0 , 251 to 1000: 0 ,1001 to 1500: 0
Cushion Both ends (Air cushion)
Port size (Rc, NPT, G) 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2
Basic, Foot, Rod side flange, Head side flange,
Mounting Single clevis, Double clevis, Center trunnion
∗ 0.05 MPa except locking parts.

Made to Order Specifications


(For details, refer to pages 1373 Locking Specifications
to 1498.) Locking position Head end, rod end, both ends
Symbol Specifications ø32 ø40 ø50 ø63 ø80 ø100
Holding force (Max.) N
-XA쏔 Change of rod end shape 550 860 1340 2140 3450 5390
Tie rod, cushion valve, tie rod nut, etc. Back lash 1.5 mm or less
-XC7
made of stainless steel Manual release Non-locking type, locking type
-XC10 Dual stroke cylinder/Double rod
-XC14 Change of trunnion bracket mounting position
Double clevis pin and double knuckle
-XC27 Accessory
pin made of stainless steel
-XC29 Double knuckle joint with spring pin Rod side Head side Single Double Center
Mounting Basic Foot flange flange clevis clevis trunnion
-XC30 Rod side trunnion
Rod end nut
Clevis pin — — — — — —
Standard
Refer to pages 322 and 327 for cylinders Locking release bolt
with an auto switch. (N type only)

• Minimum stroke for auto switch mounting Single knuckle joint


• Proper auto switch mounting position Double knuckle joint
(detection at stroke end) and mounting Option
(with pin)
height
• Operating range Rod boot
• Switch mounting bracket: Part no.

Standard Stroke
Bore (mm) Standard stroke (mm)

32 25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500
40 25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500
50 25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600
63 25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600
80 25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600, 700, 800
100 25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600, 700, 800
Intermediate strokes are available. (No spacer is used.)

316
Air Cylinder: With End Lock Series MBB

Mass/Aluminum Tube (kg) Additional Mass of Locking Part (kg)


Bore size (mm) 32 40 50 63 80 100 Bore size (mm) 32 40 50 63 80 100
Basic 0.50 0.69 1.19 1.47 2.73 3.7 Locking at head end (H) 0.08 0.13 0.21 0.30 0.75 1.1
Manual release
Foot 0.68 0.93 1.56 1.93 3.61 4.8 non-locking (N) Locking at rod end (R) 0.08 0.13 0.20 0.29 0.71 1.03
Flange 0.79 1.06 1.64 2.26 4.18 7.01 Locking at both ends (W) 0.16 0.26 0.41 0.59 1.46 2.13
Basic mass
Single clevis 0.75 0.92 1.53 2.1 3.84 6.87 Locking at head end (H) 0.09 0.15 0.23 0.32 0.78 1.13
Manual release
Double clevis 0.76 0.96 1.62 2.26 4.13 7.39 locking (L) Locking at rod end (R) 0.09 0.15 0.22 0.31 0.74 1.06
Trunnion 0.79 1.05 1.67 2.27 4.28 7.37 Locking at both ends (W) 0.18 0.30 0.45 0.63 1.52 2.19 CJ1
Additional mass All mounting Calculation example: MBBL32-100-HN
per each 50 mm stroke bracket 0.11 0.16 0.26 0.27 0.42 0.56 쎲 Basic mass ················· 0.68 CJP
쎲 Additional mass ·········· 0.11/50 stroke
Single knuckle 0.15 0.23 0.26 0.26 0.60 0.83 쎲 Cylinder stroke ··········· 100 stroke
쎲 Locking mass ············· 0.08 (Locking at head end, manual release CJ2
Accessory Double knuckle 0.22 0.37 0.43 0.43 0.87 1.27 non-locking type)
(with pin) 0.68 + 0.11 x 100/50 + 0.08 = 0.98 kg
CM2
CG1
Mounting Bracket Part No.
Bore MB
32 40 50 63 80 100
size (mm)
Foot Note 1) MB-L03 MB-L04 MB-L05 MB-L06 MB-L08 MB-L10 MB1
Flange MB-F03 MB-F04 MB-F05 MB-F06 MB-F08 MB-F10
Single clevis MB-C03 MB-C04 MB-C05 MB-C06 MB-C08 MB-C10 CA2
Double clevis MB-D03 MB-D04 MB-D05 MB-D06 MB-D08 MB-D10
Note 1) Two foot brackets required for one cylinder. CS1
Note 2) Accessories for each mounting bracket are as follows:
Foot, flange, single clevis/body mounting bolt, double clevis/body mounting bolt,
clevis pins, flat washer and cotter pins. → Refer to page 298 for details. CS2

D-쏔
-X쏔
Individual
-X쏔
Technical
data
317
Series MBB

Cautions for Using

1. Use recommended pneumatic circuit 4. Relationship with cushion


Caution Caution
For correct operation of the locking and release mechanism, please use the When cushion valve at side with locking mechanism is fully opened or
following pneumatic circuit. closed, piston rod may reached at stroke end. Thus lock is not established.
And when locking is done at cushion valve fully closed, adjust cushion valve
W since lock may not be released.

5. Release of lock
Warning
When lock is to be released, supply air pressure to the port without the
locking mechanism, this relieves the load from the lock mechanism. Then
supply pressure to the port with lock, releasing the lock and changing
cylinder direction.
(Refer to recommended pneumatic circuit.) When port without lock
W mechanism is exhausted and locking mechanism is loaded, the lock may be
With locking at head side With locking at rod side damaged due to excessive force on lock during release. Piston rod will
operate immediately.
q Do not use a 3 position solenoid valve.
Avoid using circuit with 3 position solenoid valve (especially closed center). 6. Manual release
When pressure is trapped in the port with locking mechanism, end lock is free.
When utilizing a 3 position closed center valve, even if the lock is engaged, it
Caution
may become unlocked due to pressure leakage either across the piston or the Non-locking type
valve spool. Insert attached bolt from upper side of rubber cover (no need to remove
rubber cover), tighten locking piston and pull bolt, locking will be released.
w Back pressure is required to release end lock. When bolt is released, locking begins to take place. Thread size, required
pulling force and stroke are listed below.
Be sure air is supplied to side of cylinder without the locking mechanism, as
above, prior to supplying air pressure to the side with end lock or lock may not Bore size (mm) Thread size Pulling force Stroke (mm)
be released. (Refer to “Release of lock”.)
32 ≥ M2.5 x 0.45 x 25 l 4.9 N 2
40, 50, 63 ≥ M3 x 0.5 x 30 l 10 N 3
e Release lock when mounting or adjusting the cylinder. 80, 100 ≥ M5 x 0.8 x 40 l 24.5 N 3
∗ Remove bolt under normal operations.
If mounting is done with lock engaged, lock mechanism may be damaged. It may cause malfunction of locking and release.

r Use with load 50% or less of rated capacity. Rubber cover


If cylinder is used at 50% load capacity or more, lock may be damaged.

t Do not use two cylinders in parallel at same time.


Avoid to using 2 or more end lock cylinders at same time to perform a single
task because binding may occur and one of the cylinders end lock may not
release.

y Use a speed controller as meter-out.


Meter-in control may not allow lock to release.
Locking style
u Use complete stroke or cylinder at side with end lock. Turn 90° to counterclockwise pushing M/O button. Lock is released when 왖 on
If cylinder piston does not reached end of stroke, end lock may not lock or cap and 왔 OFF mark on M/O button correspond. (Lock remains released.)
release. When locking is desired, turn M/O button clockwise 90° while pushing fully,
correspond 왖 on cap and 왔 ON mark on M/O button. The correct position is
confirmed by click sound “click”.
If not confirmed, locking is not done.
2. Operating pressure
Caution Lock
Use pressures over 0.15 MPa at port with locking mechanism. Release

3. Exhaust speed
Caution
When pressures at port with locking mechanism is decrease to 0.05 MPa
or less, it is automatically locked. When exhaust pipe at port with locking
mechanism is thin and long or speed controller is separated from cylinder
port, exhaust speed is slow and will require additional time for lock
engagement. Clogging the silencer mounted on exhaust port of solenoid
valve leads to same result.

Locked Released
318
Air Cylinder: With End Lock Series MBB

Construction
Locking at head end
Manual release non-locking type: N

!3 r #0 q u @9 #2 e y!6 #1 @8 t !2 w #3 !5 !7 14A @1 @6
!8
!9 CJ1
@0
CJP
@7
i CJ2
o ø80, ø100
CM2
CG1
!1 !0 MB

@2 @3 N@4 @5 14B MB1


Locking at rod end
CA2
CS1
CS2

Manual release non-locking type: L

Component Parts Component Parts


No. Description Material Note No. Description Material Note
q Rod cover Aluminum alloy Metallic painted !7 Lock spring Steel wire
w Head cover Aluminum alloy Metallic painted !8 Bumper Urethane
e Cylinder tube Aluminum alloy Hard anodized !9 Lock piston Carbon steel Hardened, Hard chrome plated
r Piston rod Carbon steel Hard chrome plated @0 Lock bushing Copper allow
t Piston Aluminum alloy Chromated @1 Bolt with hex. hole Alloyed steel Black zinc chromated
y Cushion ring Brass @2 M/O knob Zinc alloy Painted black
u Bushing Lead bronze casted @3 M/O bolt Alloyed steel Black zinc chromated, Painted red
i Cushion valve Steel wire Nickel plated @4 M/O spring Steel wire Zinc chromated
o Retaining ring Steel for spring ø40 to ø100 @5 Stopper ring Carbon steel Zinc chromated
!0 Tie rod Carbon steel Chromated @6 Seal retainer Rolled steel ø80, ø100 only
!1 Tie rod nut Carbon steel Nickel plated @7 Cushion valve seal NBR
!2 Wear ring Resin @8 Piston gasket NBR
!3 Rod end nut Carbon steel Nickel plated @9 ∗ Cushion seal Urethane
14A Cover A Aluminum alloy Painted black #0 ∗ Rod seal NBR
14B Cover B Carbon steel Tufftride #1 ∗ Piston seal NBR
!5 Rubber cover Synthetic rubber #2 ∗ Cylinder tube gasket NBR
!6 Piston holder Urethane #3 ∗ Lock piston seal NBR

Replacement Parts/Seal Kit (Locking at head or rod end) Replacement Parts/Seal Kit (Locking at both ends)
Bore size (mm) Kit no. Contents Bore size (mm) Kit no. Contents
32 MBB32-PS 32 MBB32-PS-W
40 MBB40-PS 40 MBB40-PS-W
50 MBB50-PS Set of the 50 MBB50-PS-W Set of the
63 MBB63-PS No. @9, #0, #1, #2 and #3. 63 MBB63-PS-W No. @9, #0, #1, #2 and #3.
80 MBB80-PS 80 MBB80-PS-W D-쏔
100 MBB100-PS 100 MBB100-PS-W
∗ Seal kits consist of items @9 to #3, and can be ordered by using the seal kit -X쏔
number corresponding to each bore size.
∗ Trunnion type should not be disassembled. (Refer to page 328.) Individual
∗ Seal kit includes a grease pack (ø32 to 50: 10 g, ø63, 80: 20 g, ø100: -X쏔
30 g).
Order with the following part number when only the grease pack is needed. Technical
Grease pack part number: GR-S-010 (10 g), GR-S-020 (20 g) data
319
Series MBB

Basic: (B)
Locking at head end: MBBB Bore size Port thread type Stroke H쏔
Manual release non-locking type: N Manual release locking type: L
W V Port
G GB HN
MM 2xP Cushion valve HR

øMO
øRF
øE
øD

WL

øE

B
C
H1
MB LL
Width across flats
Effective MA 2x4xJ DL C
thread
B
A K F N NB
H S + Stroke
ZZ + Stroke

Locking at rod end: MBBB Bore size Port thread type Stroke R쏔

Locking at both ends: MBBB Bore size Port thread type Stroke W쏔

-H쏔/-R쏔 (mm)
Bore size Stroke range Effective Width
thread across A B C D DL E F G GB H1 H HR HN J K LL MA MB
(mm) (mm) length flats
32 to 500 19.5 10 22 46 32.5 12 9 30 13 13 21 6 47 33.5 45 M6 x 1 6 15 16 4
40 to 500 27 14 30 52 38 16 12 35 13 14 27 8 51 38.5 52.5 M6 x 1 6 21 16 4
50 to 600 32 18 35 65 46.5 20 13 40 14 15.5 27.5 11 58 45 59 M8 x 1.25 7 21 16 5
63 to 600 32 18 35 75 56.5 20 13 45 14 16.5 28.5 11 58 50 64 M8 x 1.25 7 21 16 5
80 to 800 37 22 40 95 72 25 16 45 20 19 37 13 72 62 76.5 M10 x 1.5 10 30 16 5
100 to 800 37 26 40 114 89 30 16 55 20 19 37 16 72 71.5 86 M10 x 1.5 10 30 16 5

-W쏔
Bore size Stroke range
(mm) (mm) MM MO N NB P RF S V W WL ZZ S ZZ

32 to 500 M10 x 1.25 15 27 35 1/8 11 92 4 6.5 24 143 100 151


40 to 500 M14 x 1.5 19 27 40 1/4 11 97 4 9 24 152 110 165
50 to 600 M18 x 1.5 19 31.5 43.5 1/4 11 106 5 10.5 24 168 118 180
63 to 600 M18 x 1.5 19 31.5 43.5 3/8 11 106 9 12 24 168 118 180
80 to 800 M22 x 1.5 23 38 56 3/8 21 132 11.5 14 40 208 150 226
100 to 800 M26 x 1.5 23 38 56 1/2 21 132 17 15 40 208 150 226

320
Air Cylinder: With End Lock Series MBB

With Mounting Bracket


Foot(L)/Locking at head end (-H쏔)
-H쏔/ -R쏔 (mm) -W쏔
Cushion valve Port
Bore size Stroke
(mm) range X Y LD LH LS LT LX LY LZ ZZ LS ZZ

32 to 700 22 9 7 30 136 3.2 32 53 50 170 144 178

LY
40 to 800 24 11 9 33 145 3.2 38 59 55 183 158 196

LH
4 x øLD
50 to 1000 27 11 9 40 160 3.2 46 72.5 70 202 172 214
63 to 1000 27 14 12 45 160 3.6 56 82.5 80 205 172 217 CJ1
Y X X Y 80 to 1000 30 14 12 55 192 4.5 72 102.5 100 248 210 266
LS + Stroke LX 100 to 1000 32 16 14 65 196 4.5 89 122 120 252 214 270 CJP
ZZ + Stroke LZ

Front flange(F)/Locking at head end (-H쏔)


CJ2
-H쏔/ -R쏔/ -W쏔 (mm)
Cushion valve Bore size Stroke
FB FD FE FT FX FY FZ Fd
CM2
4 x øFD (mm) range
Port
32 to 700 50 7 3 10 64 32 79 25 CG1
40 to 800 55 9 3 10 72 36 90 31
50
FY

to 1000 70 9 2 12 90 45 110 38.5


MB
øFd

FB

63 to 1000 80 9 2 12 100 50 120 39.5


80 to 1000 100 12 4 16 126 63 153 45
FE FT FX 100 to 1000 120 14 4 16 150 75 178 54 MB1
FZ
CA2
Rear flange(G)/Locking at head end (-H쏔)
-H쏔/ -R쏔 (mm) -W쏔
Cushion valve
CS1
Bore size Stroke
(mm) range FB FD FT FX FY FZ ZZ ZZ
4 x øFD Port
32 to 500 50 7 10 64 32 79 149 157
CS2
40 to 500 55 9 10 72 36 90 158 171
FY

50
FB

to 600 70 9 12 90 45 110 176 188


63 to 600 80 9 12 100 50 120 176 188
80 to 800 100 12 16 126 63 153 220 238
FT FX 100 to 800 120 14 16 150 75 178 220 238
ZZ + Stroke FZ

Single clevis(C)/Locking at head end (-H쏔) -H쏔/ -R쏔 (mm) -W쏔


Cushion valve Bore size Stroke -0.1
Port L RR U CDH10 CX -0.3 Z ZZ Z ZZ
CDH10 (mm) range
32 to 500 23 10.5 13 10 14 162 172.5 170 180.5
40 to 500 23 11 13 10 14 171 182 184 195
50 to 600 30 15 17 14 20 194 209 206 221
63 to 600 30 15 17 14 20 194 209 206 221
U 80 to 800 42 23 26 22 30 246 269 264 287
CX
L RR 100 to 800 42 23 26 22 30 246 269 264 287
Z + Stroke
ZZ + Stroke

Double clevis(D)/Locking at head end (-H쏔)


Cushion valve
-H쏔/ -R쏔 (mm) -W쏔
Port Bore size Stroke +0.3
CDH10 (mm) range L RR U CDH10 CX +0.1 CZ Z ZZ Z ZZ

32 to 500 23 10.5 13 10 14 28 162 172.5 170 180.5


40 to 500 23 11 13 10 14 28 171 182 184 195
50 to 600 30 15 17 14 20 40 194 209 206 221
U 63 to 600 30 15 17 14 20 40 194 209 206 221
CX
L RR 80 to 800 42 23 26 22 30 60 246 269 264 287
Z + Stroke CZ 100 to 800 42 23 26 22 30 60 246 269 264 287
ZZ + Stroke

Center trunnion(T)/Locking at head end (-H쏔)


Z + 1/2 + Stroke Cushion valve -H쏔 (mm) -R쏔/ -W쏔
Port
Bore size Stroke D-쏔
(mm) range TDe8 TT TX TY TZ Z Z

32 -X쏔
øTDe8

to 500 12 17 50 49 74 89 97
TY

40 to 500 16 22 63 58 95 93 106
50 to 600 16 22 75 71 107 105 117 Individual
63 to 600 20 28 90 87 130 105 117 -X쏔
TT TX 80 to 800 20 34 110 110 150 129 147 Technical
TZ 100 to 800 25 40 132 136 182 129 147 data
321
Series MB

Proper Auto Switch Mounting Position (Detection at stroke end) and Mounting Height
Band mounting Tie-rod mounting
D-A3쏔/G39/K39 D-A9쏔/A9쏔V D-Z7쏔/Z80
D-M9쏔/M9쏔V D-Y59쏔/Y69쏔/Y7P/Y7PV
D-M9쏔W/M9쏔WV D-Y7쏔W/Y7쏔WV/Y7BAL
D-M9쏔AL/M9쏔AVL

Auto switch
Auto switch ≅ Hs A ≅ Hs
≅ Ht

≅ Ht
A B B

D-A44 D-A5쏔/A6쏔
D-A59W

≅ Hs
≅ Hs Auto switch
Auto switch

≅ Ht
≅ Ht

A B A B

D-F5쏔/J5쏔
D-F5쏔W/J59W/F5BAL
D-F59F/F5NTL
Auto switch
≅ Hs
≅ Ht

A B

D-P4DWL

Auto switch ≅ Hs
≅ Ht
≅ Ht

A 32 B

322
Air Cylinder Series MB

Proper Auto Switch Mounting Position (Detection at stroke end) and Mounting Height

Proper Auto Switch Mounting Position (mm)


Auto switch D-Z7쏔
model D-Z80
D-M9쏔 D-F5쏔W
D-Y59쏔
D-M9쏔V D-J59W D-A3쏔
D-Y69쏔
D-A9쏔 D-M9쏔W D-A5쏔 D-F5쏔 D-A44
D-A59W D-F5NTL D-Y7P D-P4DWL
D-A9쏔V D-M9쏔WV D-A6쏔 D-J5쏔 D-G39
D-M9쏔AL D-F5BAL D-K39
D-Y7PV
D-Y7쏔W
CJ1
D-M9쏔AVL D-F59F
D-Y7쏔WV
D-Y7BAL CJP
Bore size A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B
32 6.5 4 10.5 8 0.5 0 4.5 2 7 4.5 12 9.5 0.5 0 4 1.5 3.5 1 CJ2
40 6.5 4 10.5 8 0.5 0 4.5 2 7 4.5 12 9.5 0.5 0 4 1.5 3.5 1
50 7 4.5 11 8.5 1 0 5 2.5 7.5 5 12.5 10 1 0 4.5 2 4 1.5 CM2
63 7 4.5 11 8.5 1 0 5 2.5 7.5 5 12.5 10 1 0 4.5 2 4 1.5
80 10 8.5 14 12.5 4 2.5 8 6.5 10.5 9 15.5 14 4 2.5 7.5 6 7 5.5 CG1
100 10 8.5 14 12.5 4 2.5 8 6.5 10.5 9 15.5 14 4 2.5 7.5 6 7 5.5
125 12 12 16 16 6 6 10 10 12.5 12.5 17.5 17.5 6 6 9.5 9.5 9 9 MB
∗ Cylinders without an air cushion have different dimensions for proper auto switch mounting positions (A and B). Add the following values to
both A and B: 3 mm (ø 32 and 40), 4 mm (ø50 and 63), 5 mm (ø80 and 100), 6 mm (ø125).
Note) Adjust the auto switch after confirming the operating conditions in the actual setting.
MB1

Proper Auto Switch Mounting Height (mm)


CA2
Auto switch D-F5쏔
model D-J5쏔
D-Z7쏔 CS1
D-A9쏔 D-Z80
D-M9쏔V D-A5쏔 D-F59F D-A3쏔 D-Y69쏔
D-M9쏔 D-Y59쏔
D-M9쏔W
D-A9쏔V D-M9쏔WV D-A6쏔 D-F5쏔W D-G39 D-A44
D-Y7P
D-Y7PV D-P4DWL CS2
D-M9쏔AVL D-A59W D-J59W D-K39 D-Y7쏔WV
D-M9쏔AL D-Y7쏔W
D-F5BAL
D-Y7BAL
D-F5NTL
Bore size Hs Ht Hs Ht Hs Ht Hs Ht Hs Ht Hs Ht Hs Ht Hs Ht Hs Ht Hs Ht
32 24.5 23 27.5 23 30.5 23 35 24.5 32.5 25 67 27.5 77 27.5 25.5 23 26.5 23 38 31
40 28.5 25.5 31.5 25.5 34 25.5 38.5 27.5 36.5 27.5 71.5 27.5 81.5 27.5 29.5 26 30 26 42 33
50 33.5 31 36 31 38.5 31 43.5 34.5 41 34 77 — 87 — 33.5 31 34.5 31 46.5 39
63 38.5 36 40.5 36 43 36 48.5 39.5 46 39 83.5 — 93.5 — 39 36 40 36 51.5 44
80 46.5 45 49 45 52 45 55 46.5 52.5 46.5 92.5 — 103 — 47.5 45 48.5 45 58 51.5
100 54 53.5 57 53.5 59.5 53.5 62 55 59.5 55 103 — 113.5 — 55.5 53.5 56.5 53.5 65.5 60.5
125 65.5 64.5 68.5 64.5 71 64.5 71.5 66.5 70.5 66.5 115 — 125 — 67.5 65 68.5 65 76.5 72

Operating Range
(mm)
Bore size
Auto switch model
32 40 50 63 80 100 125
D-A9쏔/A9쏔V 7 7.5 8.5 9.5 9.5 10.5 12
D-M9쏔/M9쏔V
D-M9쏔W/M9쏔WV 4 4.5 5 6 6 6 7
D-M9쏔AL/M9쏔AVL
D-Z7쏔/Z80 7.5 8.5 7.5 9.5 9.5 10.5 13
D-A5쏔/A6쏔 9 9 10 11 11 11 10
D-A59W 13 13 13 14 14 15 17
D-A3쏔/A44 9 9 10 11 11 11 10

D-Y59쏔/Y69쏔
D-Y7P/Y7쏔V
5.5 5.5 7 7.5 6.5 5.5 7
D-Y7쏔W/Y7쏔WV
D-Y7BAL

D-F5쏔/J5쏔
D-F5쏔W/J59W
3.5 4 4 4.5 4.5 4.5 5
D-쏔
D-F5BAL/F5NTL
D-F59F -X쏔
D-G39/K39 9 9 9 10 10 11 11
Individual
D-P4DWL 4 4 4 4.5 4 4.5 4.5 -X쏔
∗ Since this is a guideline including hysteresis, not meant to be guaranteed.
(Assuming approximately ±30% dispersion.) There may be the case it will Technical
vary substantially depending on an ambient environment. data
323
Series MB

Minimum Auto Switch Mounting Stroke: Mounting Brackets Except Center Trunnion Type
n: No. of auto switches (mm)
Auto switch Mounting brackets except center trunnion type
No. of auto switches
model ø32, ø40, ø50, ø63 ø80, ø100 ø125
2 (Different surfaces, same surface)
15
1
D-A9쏔 (n – 2)
15 + 40 2
n
(n = 2, 4, 6, 8···)
2 (Different surfaces, same surface)
10
1
D-A9쏔V (n – 2)
10 + 30 2
n
(n = 2, 4, 6, 8···)
2 (Different surfaces, same surface)
15
1
D-M9쏔
(n – 2)
D-M9쏔W 15 + 40 2
n
(n = 2, 4, 6, 8···)
2 (Different surfaces, same surface)
10
1
D-M9쏔V
(n – 2)
D-M9쏔WV 10 + 30 2
n
(n = 2, 4, 6, 8···)
2 (Different surfaces, same surface)
15
1
D-M9쏔AL (n – 2)
15 + 40 2
n
(n = 2, 4, 6, 8···)
2 (Different surfaces, same surface)
15
1
D-M9쏔AVL (n – 2)
15 + 30 2
n
(n = 2, 4, 6, 8···)
2 (Different surfaces) 35
2 (Same surface) 100
D-A3쏔 35 + 30 (n – 2)
n (Different surfaces)
D-G39 (n = 2, 3, 4···)
D-K39 100 + 100 (n – 2)
n (Same surface)
(n = 2, 3, 4···)
1 10
2 (Different surfaces) 35
2 (Same surface) 55
35 + 30 (n – 2)
n (Different surfaces)
D-A44 (n = 2, 3, 4···)
55 + 50 (n – 2)
n (Same surface)
(n = 2, 3, 4···)
1 10
2 (Different surfaces, same surface)
15 20 20
1
D-A5쏔
(n – 2) (n – 2) (n – 2)
D-A6쏔 15 + 55 2
20 + 55 2
20 + 55 2
n (Same surface)
(n = 2, 4, 6, 8···) (n = 2, 4, 6, 8···) (n = 2, 4, 6, 8···)
2 (Different surfaces, same surface) 20 25 25
(n – 2) (n – 2) (n – 2)
20 + 55 2
25 + 55 2
25 + 55 2
D-A59W n (Same surface)
(n = 2, 4, 6, 8···) (n = 2, 4, 6, 8···) (n = 2, 4, 6, 8···)
1 15 25 25
D-F5쏔 2 (Different surfaces, same surface) 15 25 25
D-J5쏔 (n – 2) (n – 2) (n – 2)
D-F5쏔W 15 + 55 2
25 + 55 2
25 + 55 2
n (Same surface)
D-J59W
(n = 2, 4, 6, 8···) (n = 2, 4, 6, 8···) (n = 2, 4, 6, 8···)
D-F5BAL
D-F59F 1 10 25 25
2 (Different surfaces, same surface) 15 25 30
(n – 2) (n – 2) (n – 2)
15 + 55 2
25 + 55 2
30 + 55 2
D-F5NTL n (Same surface)
(n = 2, 4, 6, 8···) (n = 2, 4, 6, 8···) (n = 2, 4, 6, 8···)
1 10 25 30
D-Z7쏔 2 (Different surfaces, same surface)
15
D-Z80 1
D-Y59쏔 (n – 2)
D-Y7P 15 + 40 2
n
D-Y7쏔W (n = 2, 4, 6, 8···)

324
Air Cylinder Series MB

Minimum Auto Switch Mounting Stroke: Mounting Brackets Except Center Trunnion Type
n: No. of auto switches (mm)
Auto switch Mounting brackets except center trunnion type
No. of auto switches
model ø32, ø40, ø50, ø63 ø80, ø100 ø125
2 (Different surfaces, same surface)
10
D-Y69쏔 1
D-Y7PV (n – 2)
10 + 30
D-Y7쏔WV n 2
(n = 2, 4, 6, 8···)
2 (Different surfaces, same surface)
CJ1
20
1
D-Y7BAL
20 + 45
(n – 2) CJP
n 2
(n = 2, 4, 6, 8···)
2 (Different surfaces, same surface)
CJ2
15 20
1
D-P4DWL
15 + 65
(n – 2)
20 + 65
(n – 2) CM2
n 2 2
(n = 2, 4, 6, 8···) (n = 2, 4, 6, 8···)
CG1
MB
MB1
CA2
CS1
CS2

D-쏔
-X쏔
Individual
-X쏔
Technical
data
325
Series MB

Minimum Auto Switch Mounting Stroke: Center Trunnion Type


n: No. of auto switches (mm)
Center trunnion
Auto switch model No. of auto switches
ø32 ø40 ø50 ø63 ø80 ø100 ø125
2 (Different surfaces, same surface)
70 75 80 85 95 100
1
D-A9쏔 (n – 4) (n – 4) (n – 4) (n – 4) (n – 4) (n – 4)
70 + 40 75 + 40 80 + 40 2 85 + 40 2 95 + 40 2 100 + 40
n 2 2 2
(n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···)
2 (Different surfaces, same surface)
45 50 55 60 70 75
1
D-A9쏔V (n – 4) (n – 4) (n – 4) (n – 4) (n – 4) (n – 4)
45 + 30 50 + 30 55 + 30 2 60 + 30 2 70 + 30 2 75 + 30
n 2 2 2
(n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···)
2 (Different surfaces, same surface)
75 80 85 90 95 105
D-M9쏔 1
D-M9쏔W (n – 4) (n – 4) (n – 4) (n – 4) (n – 4) (n – 4)
75 + 40 80 + 40 85 + 40 2 90 + 40 2 95 + 40 2 105 + 40
n 2 2 2
(n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···)
2 (Different surfaces, same surface)
50 55 60 65 70 80
D-M9쏔V 1
D-M9쏔WV (n – 4) (n – 4) (n – 4) (n – 4) (n – 4) (n – 4)
50 + 30 55 + 30 60 + 30 2 65 + 30 2 70 + 30 2 80 + 30
n 2 2 2
(n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···)
2 (Different surfaces, same surface)
80 85 90 95 100 110
1
D-M9쏔AL (n – 4) (n – 4) (n – 4) (n – 4) (n – 4) (n – 4)
80 + 40 85 + 40 90 + 40 2 95 + 40 2 100 + 40 2 110 + 40
n 2 2 2
(n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···)
2 (Different surfaces, same surface)
55 60 65 70 75 85
1
D-M9쏔AVL (n – 4) (n – 4) (n – 4) (n – 4) (n – 4) (n – 4)
55 + 30 60 + 30 65 + 30 2 70 + 30 2 75 + 30 2 85 + 30
n 2 2 2
(n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···)
2 (Different surfaces) 60 65 75 80 85 90
2 (Same surface) 90 95 100 105 110 125
D-A3쏔 60 + 30 (n – 2) 65 + 30 (n – 2) 75 + 30 (n – 2) 80 + 30 (n – 2) 85 + 30 (n – 2) 90 + 30 (n – 2)
n (Different surfaces)
D-G39 (n = 2, 4, 6, 8···) (n = 2, 4, 6, 8···) (n = 2, 4, 6, 8···) (n = 2, 4, 6, 8···) (n = 2, 4, 6, 8···) (n = 2, 4, 6, 8···)
D-K39 90 + 100 (n – 2) 95 + 100 (n – 2) 100 + 100 (n – 2) 105 + 100 (n – 2) 110 + 100 (n – 2) 125 + 100 (n – 2)
n (Same surface)
(n = 2, 4, 6, 8···) (n = 2, 4, 6, 8···) (n = 2, 4, 6, 8···) (n = 2, 4, 6, 8···) (n = 2, 4, 6, 8···) (n = 2, 4, 6, 8···)
1 60 65 75 80 85 90
2 (Different surfaces)
70 75 80 85 90
2 (Same surface)
70 + 30 (n – 2) 75 + 30 (n – 2) 80 + 30 (n – 2) 85 + 30 (n – 2) 90 + 30 (n – 2)
n (Different surfaces)
D-A44 (n = 2, 4, 6, 8···) (n = 2, 4, 6, 8···) (n = 2, 4, 6, 8···) (n = 2, 4, 6, 8···) (n = 2, 4, 6, 8···)
70 + 50 (n – 2) 75 + 50 (n – 2) 80 + 50 (n – 2) 85 + 50 (n – 2) 90 + 50 (n – 2)
n (Same surface)
(n = 2, 4, 6, 8···) (n = 2, 4, 6, 8···) (n = 2, 4, 6, 8···) (n = 2, 4, 6, 8···) (n = 2, 4, 6, 8···)
1 70 75 80 85 90
2 (Different surfaces, same surface)
60 80 105 110 115
D-A5쏔 1
D-A6쏔 (n – 4) (n – 4) (n – 4) (n – 4) (n – 4)
60 + 55 80 + 55 105 + 55 110 + 55 115 + 55
n (Same surface) 2 2 2 2 2
(n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···)
2 (Different surfaces, same surface) 60 70 85 110 115 120
(n – 4) (n – 4) (n – 4) (n – 4) (n – 4) (n – 4)
60 + 55 70 + 55 85 + 55 110 + 55 115 + 55 120 + 55
D-A59W n (Same surface) 2 2 2 2 2 2
(n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···)
1 60 70 85 110 115 120
D-F5쏔/J5쏔 2 (Different surfaces, same surface) 90 95 110 115 120 130
D-F5쏔W (n – 4) (n – 4) (n – 4) (n – 4) (n – 4) (n – 4)
90 + 55 95 + 55 2 110 + 55 115 + 55 120 + 55 130 + 55
D-J59W n (Same surface) 2 2 2 2 2
D-F5BAL (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···)
D-F59F 1 90 95 110 115 120 130
2 (Different surfaces, same surface) 100 105 120 125 130 140
(n – 4) (n – 4) (n – 4) (n – 4) (n – 4) (n – 4)
100 + 55 105 + 55 120 + 55 125 + 55 130 + 55 140 + 55
D-F5NTL n (Same surface) 2 2 2 2 2 2
(n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···)
1 100 105 120 125 130 140
D-Z7쏔 2 (Different surfaces, same surface)
80 85 90 95 100 105
D-Z80 1
D-Y59쏔 (n – 4) (n – 4) (n – 4) (n – 4) (n – 4) (n – 4)
D-Y7P 80 + 40 85 + 40 90 + 40 95 + 40 100 + 40 105 + 40
n 2 2 2 2 2 2
D-Y7쏔W (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···)
2 (Different surfaces, same surface)
60 65 70 75 85 85
D-Y69쏔 1
D-Y7PV (n – 4) (n – 4) (n – 4) (n – 4) (n – 4) (n – 4)
D-Y7쏔WV 60 + 30 65 + 30 70 + 30 75 + 30 85 + 30 85 + 30
n 2 2 2 2 2 2
(n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···)
326
Air Cylinder Series MB

Minimum Auto Switch Mounting Stroke: Center Trunnion Type


n: No. of auto switches (mm)
Center trunnion
Auto switch model No. of auto switches
ø32 ø40 ø50 ø63 ø80 ø100 ø125
2 (Different surfaces, same surface)
85 90 100 105 110 115
1
D-Y7BAL (n – 4) (n – 4) (n – 4) (n – 4) (n – 4) (n – 4)
85 + 45 2
90 + 45 2
100 + 45 2 105 + 45 2 110 + 45 2 115 + 45 2
n
(n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···)
2 (Different surfaces, same surface)
CJ1
120 130 140 150
1
D-P4DWL
120 + 65
(n – 4)
130 + 65
(n – 4)
140 + 65
(n – 4)
150 + 65
(n – 4) CJP
n 2 2 2 2
(n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···)
CJ2
Auto Switch Mounting Bracket: Part No.
CM2

Auto switch model


Bore size (mm) CG1
ø32 ø40 ø50 ø63 ø80 ø100 ø125
D-A9쏔/A9쏔V MB
D-M9쏔/M9쏔V
BMB5-032 BMB5-032 BA7-040 BA7-040 BA7-063 BA7-063 BA7-080
D-M9쏔W/M9쏔WV
D-M9쏔AL/M9쏔AVL MB1
D-A3쏔/A44
D-G39/K39
BMB2-032 BMB2-040 BMB1-050 BMB1-063 BMB1-080 BMB1-100 BS1-125 CA2
D-A5쏔/A6쏔
D-A59W CS1
D-F5쏔/J5쏔
D-F5쏔W/J59W
D-F59F
BT-03 BT-03 BT-05 BT-05 BT-06 BT-06 BT-08
CS2
D-F5BAL
D-F5NTL · The figure shows the mounting example for
D-P4DWL BMB3T-040 BMB3T-040 BMB3T-050 BMB3T-050 BMB3T-080 BMB3T-080 BAP2T-080 D-A9쏔(V)/M9쏔(V)/M9쏔W(V)/M9쏔A(V)L.

D-Z7쏔/Z80
D-Y59쏔/Y69쏔
D-Y7P/Y7PV
BMB4-032 BMB4-032 BMB4-050 BMB4-050 BA4-063 BA4-063 BA4-080
D-Y7쏔W
D-Y7쏔WV
D-Y7BAL
[Stainless Steel Mounting Screw Kit]
The following set of stainless steel mounting screws (including set screws) is available. Use them in accordance with the
operating environment. (Since auto switch brackets are not included, order them separately.)
BBA1: For D-A5/A6/F5/J5 types
Note 1) Refer to page 1365 for the details of BBA1.
The above stainless steel screws are used when a cylinder is shipped with D-F5BAL type auto switches.
When only a switch is shipped independently, BBA1 is attached.
Note 2) When using D-M9쏔A(V)L/Y7BAL, do not use the steel set screws which is included with the auto switch mounting brackets
above (BMB5-032, BA7-쏔쏔쏔, BMB4-쏔쏔쏔, BA4-쏔쏔쏔). Order a stainless steel screw set (BBA1) separately, and select and
use the M4 x 6L stainless steel set screws included in the BBA1.

In addition to the auto switches listed above, the following auto switches are also available.
Refer to pages 1263 to 1371 for the detailed specifications.
Auto switch type Part no. Electrical entry (Entry direction) Features
D-A93V, A96V —
Grommet (perpendicular)
D-A90V Without indicator light
Reed auto switch
D-A53, A56, Z73, Z76 —
Grommet (in-line)
D-A67, Z80 Without indicator light
D-M9NV, M9PV, M9BV

D-Y69A, Y69B, Y7PV
D-M9NWV, M9PWV, M9BWV Grommet (perpendicular) Diagnostic indication
D-Y7NWV, Y7PWV, Y7BWV (2-color)
D-M9NAVL, M9PAVL, M9BAVL Water resistant (2-color indication)
D-F59, F5P, J59
Solid state auto switch —
D-Y59A, Y59B, Y7P D-쏔
D-F59W, F5PW, J59W Diagnostic indication
D-Y7NW, Y7PW, Y7BW Grommet (in-line) (2-color)
D-F5BAL, Y7BAL Water resistant (2-color indication)
-X쏔
D-F5NTL With timer Individual
D-P5DWL Magnetic field resistant (2-color indication) -X쏔
∗ For solid state switches, auto switches with a pre-wired connector are also available. Refer to pages 1328 and 1329 for details.
∗ Normally closed (NC = b contact) solid state auto switches (D-F9G/F9H/Y7G/Y7H types) are also available. Refer to page 1290 and 1292 for details.
Technical
data
327
Series MB
Specific Product Precautions
Be sure to read before handling.
Refer to front matters 54 and 55 for Safety Instructions and pages 3 to 11 for Actuator
and Auto Switch Precautions.

Adjustment Non-rotating rod (Double acting, Single rod)

Warning Handling
1. Do not open the cushion valve beyond the Caution
stopper.
Crimping (ø32) or a snap ring (ø40 to ø100) is provided to prevent 1. Avoid using the air cylinder in such a way
the accidental removal of the cushion valve. Do not open the that more than allowable rotational torque
valve beyond the mechanism. If air is supplied, the cushion valve would be applied to the piston rod.
may shoot out from the cover.
If rotational torque is applied, the non-rotating guide will deform,
thus affecting the non-rotating accuracy. valve may shoot out from
Bore (mm) Cushion valve width across flats Socket wrench the cover.
JIS 4648
32, 40 2.5 Hexagonal spanner wrench 2.5
JIS 4648
50, 63 3 Hexagonal spanner wrench 3
JIS 4648
80, 100 4 Hexagonal spanner wrench 4
Mounting and Piping
JIS 4648
125 4 Hexagonal spanner wrench 4

2. Use the air cushion at the end of cylinder


Caution
stroke. 1. Mounting a workpiece on the rod end
Select the cylinder with bumper “N” if cushion valve is to be fully To screw a bracket or a nut onto the threaded portion at the tip of
opened. the piston rod, make sure to retract the piston rod entirely, and
place a wrench over the flat portion of the rod that protrudes. To
Tie rods or piston assembly may be damaged if neither air
tighten, take precautions to prevent the tightening torque from
cushion nor bumper is utilized.
being applied to the non-rotating guide.
3. When replacing mounting bracket, use a
socket wrench.
Width Tightening
Bore (mm) Bolt across flats torque (N·m)
32, 40 MB-32-48-C1247 4 05.1
50, 63 MB-50-48-C1249 5 11

80, Foot MB-80-48AC1251


6 25
100 Other MB-80-48BC1251
Foot M12 x 1.75 x 25 (brazier head cap screw)
125 8 30.1
Other M12 x 1.75 x 28 (brazier head cap screw)

4. When replacing a bracket, tie-rod nuts on


the cylinder body become loosened.
After retightening the tie-rod nuts with the proper tightening torque
(Refer to Adjustment 3.), mount a mounting bracket.
5. There is no mounting interchangeability with
serise CA1.
6. Mounting precision is required for the
trunnion type cylinder.
It is difficult to align the axial center of the trunnion with the axial
center of the cylinder. Thus, if this type of cylinder is
disassembled and reassembled, the required dimensional
accuracy cannot be attained, which may lead to malfunctions.

328
Square Tube Type Air Cylinder
Series MB1
ø32, ø40, ø50, ø63, ø80, ø100, ø125
Increased kinetic energy Space-saving auto switch mounting
Space is saved by setting switches into grooves
absorption provided on 4 surfaces. This is also effective

The absorption of kinetic energy has been


to prevent loosening and damage, etc. CJ1
increased by nearly 30% compared to the
CA1 series, through increased cushion CJP
volume and the use of a new cushion seal.
In addition, the life of the cushion seal is
approximately 5 times longer. Port CJ2
Easy cushion valve adjustment
Improved cushion capacity aperture CM2
Adjustment of the cushion valve is made
Piston rod lurching, due with a hexagon wrench key allowing for
to cracking pressure at easy fine adjustment. CG1
start up, has been Furthermore, the cushion valve has been
eliminated by means of a recessed so that it does not protrud
from the cover.
MB
floating seal mechanism.

MB1
Compact and lightweight
CA2
The height and width of the covers
has been reduced by nearly 10%,
and in addition, die-cast covers yield CS1
10 to 25% weight reduction over the Appearance improved by
CA1 series. enclosing the tie-rods CS2
Employs a square tube with enclosed tie-rods
which is integrated with both covers to
achieve an attractive, unified appearance.

Improved workpiece Dust accumulation can be


mounting accuracy prevented with fastener strips
High precision has been achieved in the
Auto switch mounting grooves can be covered
cylinder unit and the mounting brackets.
with resin fastener strips, which adhere tightly to
Improved mounting accuracy simplifies
the tube (option) to prevent the entry and
Piston rod sagging reduced the mounting process
accumulation of dirt.
and also extends
Sagging of the piston rod has been reduced cylinder life.
by increasing the precision of the bushing
and piston rod, and reducing their
clearances.
t
t ke
Standard stroke (mm) ne ac
Bore size ag t br ry
50 100 150 200 300 400 500 700 m oo g so
in in
(mm) 25 75 125 175 250 350 450 600 800
ilt-
b nt es
d ou Ac
c
Series Variations Bu Ro M
(Standard)
JIS Symbol 32 Basic style Rod end nut
Axial foot style (Option)
Rod side flange style
Standard type: Double acting

Knuckle joint pin Page


Single Rod Head side flange style Clevis pin
Single clevis style Single knuckle joint 332
Series MB1 40 Double clevis style Double knuckle joint
Trunnion pivot bracket
Center trunnion style Double clevis pivot bracket

(Standard)
JIS Symbol Rod end nut
50 Basic style
Foot style (Option) Page
Double Rod Knuckle joint pin
Flange style Single knuckle joint 340
Series MB1W Center trunnion style Double knuckle joint
63 Trunnion pivot bracket

Basic style (Standard)


JIS Symbol Axial foot style
Rod end nut
(Option)
Rod side flange style Knuckle joint pin Page
Non-rotating Rod 80 Head side flange style Clevis pin
Series MB1K Single clevis style
Double clevis style
Single knuckle joint
Double knuckle joint
345 D-쏔
Trunnion pivot bracket
Center trunnion style Double clevis pivot bracket
100 -X쏔
Individual
-X쏔
125
Technical
* ø125 is not available for MB1K. 1000 data
900
329
Combinations of Standard Products and Made
Series MB1

: Standard Series MB1


: Made to Order specifications (Standard)
: Special product (Contact SMC for details.)
Action/
Double acting
Type
: Not available Single rod
Cushion
Air Rubber
Applicable
Symbol Specification bore size ø32 to ø100 ø125 ø32 to ø100 ø125

Standard Standard
Long st Long stroke
D Built-in magnet
MB1쏔-쏔 KJ With rod boot ø32 to ø125
10- Clean series
20- Copper and Fluorine-free
MB1쏔 RV Water resistant
XA쏔 Change of rod end shape
XB5 Oversized rod cylinder
XB6 Heat-resistant cylinder (–10 to 150 C)
XB13 Low-speed cylinder (5 to 50 mm/s)
XC3 Special port position
XC4 With heavy duty scraper
XC5 Heat-resistant cylinder (–10 to 110 C)
XC6 Made of stainless steel
Tie-rod, cushion valve, tie-rod nut, etc.
XC7 made of stainless steel
XC8 Adjustable stroke cylinder/Adjustable extension type
XC9 Adjustable stroke cylinder/Adjustable retraction type
XC10 Dual stroke cylinder/Double rod type
ø32 to ø125
XC11 Dual stroke cylinder/Single rod type
XC12 Tandem cylinder
XC22 Fluororubber seal
Double clevis pins made of
XC27 Stainless steel (Stainless steel 304)

XC29 Double knuckle joint with spring pin

Note 1) Note 1)
XC30 Rod side trunnion
XC35 With coil scraper

XC59 Fluororubber seal, Built-in hard plastic magnet

XC65 XC6 + XC7 specifications


X846 Fastener strips mounted on switch mounting grooves
Note 1) For Series MB1, a T bracket can be used only when selecting XC30.
Note 2) XC10 specification for Series MBK is the non-rotating type on both sides. For only one side, submit a special order request form.

330
to Order Specifications
Series MB1

MB1 MB1K
(Standard) (Non-rotating)
Double acting
Double rod Single rod Double rod
Air Rubber Air Rubber Air Rubber CJ1
ø32 to ø100 ø125 ø32 to ø100 ø125 ø32 to ø100
CJP
CJ2
CM2
CG1
MB
MB1
CA2
CS1
CS2

Note 2) Note 2)

Note 1) Note 1) Note 1) Note 1) Note 1) Note 1)

D-쏔
-X쏔
Individual
-X쏔
Technical
data
331
Square Tube Type Air Cylinder: Standard Type
Double Acting, Single Rod

Series MB1
ø32, ø40, ø50, ø63, ø80, ø100, ø125

How to Order

MB1 L 32 50
With auto switch MDB1 L 32 50 M9BW
Made to Order
(Refer to page 333 for details.)
With auto switch
(Built-in magnet)

Number of auto switches


Mounting style Nil 2 pcs.
B Basic style S 1 pc.
L Axial foot style Bore size 3 3 pcs.
F Rod side flange style n “n” pcs.
32 32 mm
G Head side flange style 40 40 mm
C Single clevis style 50 50 mm
D Double clevis style Auto switch
63 63 mm
Nil Without auto switch
80 80 mm
100 100 mm ∗ For the applicable auto switch part numbers,
refer to the table below.
125 125 mm

Port thread type Suffix for cylinder


Nil None
Nil Rc
Rod boot J Nylon tarpaulin
TN NPT Cylinder stroke (mm) K Heat resistant tarpaulin
TF G (Refer to page 333 for standard strokes.)
Nil Air cushion at both ends
Cushion
N Note) Without air cushion
Note) In the case of w/o air cushion, it comes with
Built-in Magnet Cylinder Model rubber bumper.
Besides, the overall length is longer than the
If a built-in magnet cylinder without an auto cylinder with air cushion as follows, because
switch is required, there is no need to enter the bumpers are attached to the both sides of
the piston: ø32, ø40: +6 mm, ø50, ø63: +8 mm,
the symbol for the auto switch. ø80, ø100: +10 mm, ø125: +12 mm.
(Example) MDB1F40-100

Applicable Auto Switch/Refer to pages 1263 to 1371 for further information on auto switches.
Lead wire length (m)
Indicator light

Load voltage Auto switch model


Electrical Wiring 0.5 1 3 5 Pre-wired Applicable load
Type Special function (Output) DC AC Perpendicular In-line
entry (Nil) (M) (L) (Z) connector
3-wire (NPN) M9NV M9N
5V, 12V IC circuit
Solid state switch

3-wire (PNP) M9PV M9P


2-wire 12V M9BV M9B —
3-wire (NPN) M9NWV M9NW
Diagnostic indication 5V, 12V IC circuit Relay,
Yes

Grommet 3-wire (PNP) 24V — M9PWV M9PW PLC


(2-color indication)
2-wire 12V M9BWV M9BW —
3-wire (NPN) M9NAV M9NA
Water resistant 5V, 12V IC circuit
3-wire (PNP) M9PAV M9PA
(2-color indication)
2-wire 12V M9BAV M9BA —
3-wire
— 5V — A96V A96 — — — —
switch

(NPN equivalent) IC circuit


Yes
Reed

Grommet
100V A93V A93 — — — — Relay,
2-wire 24V 12V
No

100V or less A90V A90 — — —IC circuit PLC


∗ Lead wire length symbols: 0.5 m ·······Nil (Example) M9NW ∗ Solid state auto switches marked with “ ” are produced upon receipt of order.
1 m ······· M (Example) M9NWM
3 m ······· L (Example) M9NWL
5 m ······· Z (Example) M9NWZ
∗ Since there are other applicable auto switches than listed above, refer to page 350 for details.
∗ For details about auto switches with pre-wired connector, refer to pages 1328 and 1329.
∗ Auto switches are shipped together (not assembled).
332
Square Tube Type Air Cylinder: Standard Type
Double Acting, Single Rod Series MB1
Specifications
Bore size (mm) 32 40 50 63 80 100 125
Action Double acting, Single rod
Fluid Air
Proof pressure 1.5 MPa
Maximum operating pressure 1.0 MPa
Minimum operating pressure 0.05 MPa

Ambient and fluid temperature


CJ1
Lubrication Not required (Non-lube)
Piston speed 50 to 1000 mm/s 50 to CJP
700 mm/s
Stroke length tolerance Up to 250:+1.0 +1.4 +1.8
0 , 251 to 1000: 0 , 1001 to 1500: 0

Both ends (Air cushion) Note)


CJ2
Cushion
JIS Symbol
Double acting
Port size (Rc, NPT, G) 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 CM2
Basic style, Foot style, Rod side flange style, Head side flange style
Mounting
Single clevis style, Double clevis style CG1
Note) In the case of w/o air cushion, it comes with rubber bumper.
MB
Standard Stroke MB1
Made to Order Specifications Bore size Maximum
(For details, refer to pages 1373 to 1498 and 1514.) Standard stroke (mm) manufacturable
(mm) stroke CA2
Symbol Specifications 32 25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500 700
—XA쏔 Change of rod end shape 40 25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500 800 CS1
—XB5 Oversized rod cylinder 50 25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600 1000
—XB6 Heat resistant cylinder (150 ) 63 25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600 1000
CS2
—XC3 Special port location
80 25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600, 700, 800 1000
—XC4 With heavy duty scraper
100 25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600, 700, 800 1000
—XC5 Heat resistant cylinder (110 )
—XC6 Piston rod and rod end nut made of stainless steel
125 25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600, 700, 800, 1000 1400
Note) Intermediate strokes are available, too. (Spacer is not used.)
—XC7 Tie-rod, cushion valve, tie rod nut, etc.
made of stainless steel
—XC8 Adjustable stroke cylinder/Adjustable extension type Accessory
—XC9 Adjustable stroke cylinder/Adjustable retraction type
Basic Foot Rod side Head side Single Double
—XC10 Dual stroke cylinder/Double rod type Mounting
style style flange style flange style clevis style clevis style
—XC11 Dual stroke cylinder/Single rod type
Standard Rod end nut
—XC12 Tandem type cylinder
equipment Clevis pin
—XC22 Fluororubber seals
Single knuckle joint
—XC27 Double clevis pin and double knuckle pin
made of stainless steel Double knuckle joint
Option
—XC29 Double knuckle joint with spring pin (With pin)
—XC30 Rod side trunnion Rod boot
—XC35 With coil scraper
Fluororubber seals
—XC59 Built-in hard plastic magnet
Mounting Bracket Part No.
—XC65 XC6 + XC7 specifications Bore size
32 40 50 63 80 100 125
—X846 Fastener strips mounted on switch mounting grooves (mm)
(1)
Foot MB-L03 MB-L04 MB-L05 MB-L06 MB-L08 MB-L10 MB-L12
Flange MB-F03 MB-F04 MB-F05 MB-F06 MB-F08 MB-F10 MB-F12
Single clevis MB-C03 MB-C04 MB-C05 MB-C06 MB-C08 MB-C10 MB-C12
Double clevis MB-D03 MB-D04 MB-D05 MB-D06 MB-D08 MB-D10 MB-D12
Refer to pages 349 and 350 for cylinders
Note 1) Order two foot brackets per cylinder.
with auto switches. Note 2) Accessories for each mounting bracket are as follows. Foot, flange, single clevis/body mounting
bolt, double clevis/body mounting bolt, clevis pins, cotter pins and flat washer. Refer to page
Minimum auto switch mounting stroke 339 for details.
Proper auto switch mounting position
(detection at stroke end) and mounting height Rod Boot Material D-쏔
Operating range Symbol Rod boot material
Switch mounting bracket: Part no.
J Nylon tarpaulin -X쏔
K ∗
Heat resistant tarpaulin Individual
∗ Maximum ambient temperature for the rod boot itself. -X쏔
Technical
data
333
Series MB1
Theoretical Output (N) OUT IN

Bore size Rod size Operating Piston area Operating pressure (MPa)
(mm) (mm) direction (mm2) 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0
OUT 804 161 241 322 402 482 563 643 724 804
32 12
IN 691 138 207 276 346 415 484 553 622 691
OUT 1257 251 377 503 629 754 880 1006 1131 1257
40 16
IN 1056 211 317 422 528 634 739 845 950 1056
OUT 1963 393 589 785 982 1178 1374 1570 1767 1963
50 20
IN 1649 330 495 660 825 989 1154 1319 1484 1649
OUT 3117 623 935 1247 1559 1870 2182 2494 2805 3117
63 20
IN 2803 561 841 1121 1402 1682 1962 2242 2523 2803
OUT 5027 1005 1508 2011 2514 3016 3519 4022 4524 5027
80 25
IN 4536 907 1361 1814 2268 2722 3175 3629 4082 4536
OUT 7854 1571 2356 3142 3927 4712 5498 6283 7069 7854
100 30
IN 7147 1429 2144 2859 3574 4288 5003 5718 6432 7147
OUT 12272 2454 3682 4909 6136 7363 8590 9818 11045 12272
125 32
IN 11468 2294 3440 4588 5734 6881 8028 9174 10321 11468
Note) Theoretical output (N) = Pressure (MPa) x Piston area (mm2)

Mass (kg)
Bore size (mm) 32 40 50 63 80 100 125
Basic style 0.53 0.72 1.24 1.54 2.84 3.83 5.68
Foot style 0.65 0.86 1.46 1.82 3.34 4.49 7.76
Basic mass Flange style 0.82 1.09 1.69 2.33 4.29 7.14 9.84
Single clevis style 0.78 0.95 1.58 2.17 3.95 7.0 8.25
Double clevis style 0.79 0.99 1.67 2.33 4.24 7.52 8.45
Additional mass per
each 50 mm of stroke All mounting brackets 0.16 0.21 0.33 0.37 0.56 0.72 0.94

Single knuckle 0.15 0.23 0.26 0.26 0.60 0.83 1.10


Accessory bracket
Double knuckle (With pin) 0.22 0.37 0.43 0.43 0.87 1.27 0.91
Calculation:
(Example) MB1B32-100 (Basic style/ø32, 100 st)
• Basic mass·····················0.53 (Basic style, ø32) Kinetic Energy Absorbable by Allowable Kinetic Energy
• Additional mass··············0.16/50 mm stroke 2000
the Cushion Mechanism ø125
• Cylinder stroke···············100 mm stroke
0.53 + 0.16 x 100/50 = 0.85 kg Bore size Effective cushion Kinetic energy 1000 ø100
(mm) length (mm) absorbable (J)
ø80
32 18.8 2.2 500
400 ø63
40 18.8 3.4
Consideration of the Cushion 50 21.3 5.9
300

200 ø50
For details about the kinetic energy absorbable 63 21.3 11
ø40
by the cushion mechanism and w/ air cushion, 80 30.3 20
refer to page 1571. 100
ø32
100 29.3 29
Load mass (kg)

Rod side 31.4


125 43 50
Head side 29.4 40
30
With Air Cushion
At the stroke end, when stopping a large amount of 20
kinetic energy generated by a large load and high
speed operation, compression of air is used to
10
absorb the impact without transmitting vibration to
the surroundings. The purpose of an air cushion is
not to reduce the speed of a piston as it nears the 5
stroke end. The kinetic energy of load can be found 4
using the following formula. 3
υ
2
M
1
50

M 2
0

0
0

υ
00
10

20

30

40
50

Ek =
10

2
Ek : Kinetic energy (J) Max. speed (mm/s)
M : Mass of load (kg)
υ : Piston speed (m/s) Example) Load limit at rod end when the air cylinder
If the kinetic energy obtained is no greater than the ø63 is actuated with max. speed of 500
absorbable kinetic energy shown in the table above, mm/s.
Extend upward from 500 mm/s on the
the life of the cushion seal will be 10 million cycles or
horizontal axis of the graph to the
more.
intersection point with the line for a tube
bore of 63 mm, and then extend leftward
from this point to find the load of 80 kg.

334
Square Tube Type Air Cylinder: Standard Type
Double Acting, Single Rod Series MB1
Construction

CJ1
CJP
CJ2
CM2
Cylinder tube sectional view A-A´ A'
CG1

Component Parts MB
No. Description Material Note No. Description Material Note
1 Rod cover Aluminum die-casted Metallic painted 14∗ Cushion seal Urethane MB1
2 Head cover Aluminum die-casted Metallic painted 15∗ Rod seal NBR
3 Cylinder tube Aluminum alloy Hard anodized 16∗ Piston seal NBR CA2
4 Piston rod Carbon steel Hard chrome plated 17 Cushion valve seal NBR
5 Piston Aluminum alloy Chromated 18∗ Cylinder tube gasket NBR CS1
6 Cushion ring Brass 19 Piston gasket NBR
7 Bushing Lead-bronze casted
8 Cushion valve Steel wire Nickel plated
CS2
9 Retaining ring Spring steel ø40 to ø100 Copper/Fluorine-free
10 Tie-rod Carbon steel Zinc chromated
11 Tie-rod nut Carbon steel Nickel plated 20-MB1 Mounting style Bore size Port thread type Stroke Suffix
12 Wear ring Resin
13 Rod end nut Carbon steel Nickel plated Copper/Fluorine-free
The type which prevents copper based ions from generating by
changing the copper based materials into non-copper materials in
Replacement Parts/ Seal Kit order to eliminate the effects by copper based ions or fluororesins over
the color cathode ray tube.
Bore size
(mm) Kit no. Contents

32 MB32 — PS Specifications
40 MB40 — PS Action Double acting, Single rod
50 MB50 — PS Set of the above nos. Bore size (mm) ø32, ø40, ø50, ø63, ø80, ø100
63 MB63 — PS , , , Max. operating pressure 1.0 MPa
80 MB80 — PS Min. operating pressure 0.05 MPa
100 MB100 — PS Cushion Air cushion∗
∗ Seal kit includes 14 to 16, 18. Order the seal kit, based on each bore size. Piping Screw-in type
∗ Seal kit includes a grease pack (ø32 to 50 : 10 g, ø63, 80 : 20 g, ø100 : Piston speed 50 to 1000 mm/s
30g). Order with the following part number when only the grease pack is needed. Basic style, Axial foot style, Rod side flange style
Grease pack part number : GR-S-010 (10g), GR-S-020 (20g) Mounting Head side flange style, Single clevis style,
Double clevis style, Center trunnion style
∗ Auto switch can be mounted.
Use within the energy absorption. (Refer to page 334.)
∗ When there is no air cushion, the unit is equipped with rubber bumpers.
Water Resistant Air Cylinders
As compared to the standard cylinder, anti-coolant performance has been
improved, and suitable for using under the atmosphere having coolant in the
machine tools. Improved water resistant air cylinder, Series MB is also available,
which is compliant for the environment having water splashed on the food
machinery, or car washing machine, etc. Refer to page 899 for details.

D-쏔
-X쏔
Individual
-X쏔
Technical
data
335
Series MB1
Standard Type

Basic style: (B)


Cushion valve

MM G 2xP G W V Port
With rod boot

E
øe

øD
øE
ød

H1
MB
10.2 Effective
thread 16 2x4xJ
10.2 l f A K F N N 쏔C
h H S + Stroke 쏔B
ZZ + Stroke

Without Air Cushion


Bore size Bore size
(mm)
S ZZ (mm)
S ZZ
32 90 141 63 102 164
∗ In the case of w/o air cushion, it comes with rubber bumper. Besides, the overall length is longer 40 90 145 80 124 200
than the cylinder with air cushion as follows, because the bumpers are attached to the both sides of 50 102 164 100 124 200
the piston: ø32, ø40: +6 mm, ø50, ø63: +8 mm, ø80, ø100: +10 mm, ø125: +12 mm. 125 132 235

Bore size Stroke Effective Width


(mm) range thread length across A B C D Ee11 F G H1 H MA MB J K MM N P S∗ V W ZZ ∗
flats
32 Up to 500 19.5 10 22 46 32.5 12 30 13 13 6 47 16 4 M6 x 1 6 M10 x 1.25 27 1/8 84 4 6.5 135
40 Up to 500 27 14 30 52 38 16 35 13 14 8 51 16 4 M6 x 1 6 M14 x 1.5 27 1/4 84 4 9 139
50 Up to 600 32 18 35 65 46.5 20 40 14 15.5 11 58 16 5 M8 x 1.25 7 M18 x 1.5 31.5 1/4 94 5 10.5 156
63 Up to 600 32 18 35 75 56.5 20 45 14 16.5 11 58 16 5 M8 x 1.25 7 M18 x 1.5 31.5 3/8 94 9 12 156
80 Up to 800 37 22 40 95 72 25 45 20 19 13 72 16 5 M10 x 1.5 10 M22 x 1.5 38 3/8 114 11.5 14 190
100 Up to 800 37 26 40 114 89 30 55 20 19 16 72 16 5 M10 x 1.5 10 M26 x 1.5 38 1/2 114 17 15 190
125 Up to 1000 50 27 54 136 110 32 60 27 19 16 97 20 6 M12 x 1.75 13 M27 x 2 38 1/2 120 17 15 223

With Rod Boot (mm)


Bore size l h
(mm) d e f
1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 300 301 to 400 401 to 500 501 to 600 601 to 700 701 to 800 801 to 900 901 to 1000 1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 300 301 to 400 401 to 500 501 to 600 601 to 700 701 to 800 801 to 900 901 to 1000
32 54 36 23 12.5 25 37.5 50 75 100 125 — — — — — 73 86 98 111 136 161 186 — — — — —
40 56 41 23 12.5 25 37.5 50 75 100 125 — — — — — 81 94 106 119 144 169 194 — — — — —
50 64 51 25 12.5 25 37.5 50 75 100 125 150 — — — — 89 102 114 127 152 177 202 227 — — — —
63 64 51 25 12.5 25 37.5 50 75 100 125 150 — — — — 89 102 114 127 152 177 202 227 — — — —
80 68 56 29 12.5 25 37.5 50 75 100 125 150 175 200 — — 101 114 126 139 164 189 214 239 264 289 — —
100 76 61 29 12.5 25 37.5 50 75 100 125 150 175 200 — — 101 114 126 139 164 189 214 239 264 289 — —
125 82 75 27 10 20 30 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 120 130 140 150 170 190 210 230 250 270 290 310

Standard Type: With Mounting Bracket ∗ Dimensions not shown are the same as basic style. (drawing above)

Without Air Cushion


Foot style (L) Cushion valve Port Bore size
(mm)
LS ZZ
32 134 168
40 138 176
50 156 198
LY

63 156 201
4 x øLD
LH
LT

80 184 240
100 188 244
125 222 294
Y X X Y
LS + Stroke LX Foot Style (mm)
ZZ + Stroke LZ ∗ ∗
Bore size Stroke X Y LD LH LS LT LX LY LZ ZZ
(mm) range
32 Up to 700 22 9 7 30 128 3.2 32 53 50 162
40 Up to 800 24 11 9 33 132 3.2 38 59 55 170
∗ In the case of w/o air cushion, it comes with rubber bumper. Besides, the overall length is
50 Up to 1000 27 11 9 40 148 3.2 46 72.5 70 190
longer than the cylinder with air cushion as follows, because the bumpers are attached to
63 Up to 1000 27 14 12 45 148 3.6 56 82.5 80 193
the both sides of the piston: ø32, ø40: +6 mm, ø50, ø63: +8 mm, ø80, ø100: +10 mm,
80 Up to 1000 30 14 12 55 174 4.5 72 102.5 100 230
ø125: +12 mm.
100 Up to 1000 32 16 14 65 178 4.5 89 122 120 234
125 Up to 1400 45 20 14 81 210 8 90 149 136 282
336
Square Tube Type Air Cylinder: Standard Type
Double Acting, Single Rod Series MB1
Standard Type: With Mounting Bracket

Rod side flange style (F) Rod Side Flange Style


Bore size Stroke
Cushion valve Port (mm) range FB FD FE FT FX FY FZ Fd
4 x øFD 32 Up to 700 50 7 3 10 64 32 79 25
40 Up to 800 55 9 3 10 72 36 90 31
50 Up to 1000 70 9 2 12 90 45 110 38.5
øFd

FB
FY
63 Up to 1000 80 9 2 12 100 50 120 39.5
80 Up to 1000 100 12 4 16 126 63 153 45.5
100 Up to 1000 120 14 4 16 150 75 178 54
CJ1
FE FT FX 125 Up to 1400 138 14 7 20 180 102 216 57.5
FZ
CJP
CJ2
Without
Head side flange style (G) Air Cushion CM2
Bore size
Cushion valve Port (mm) ZZ
4 x øFD 32 147
CG1
40 151
50, 63 172 MB
FB
FY

80, 100 212


Head Side Flange Style 125 249 MB1
Bore size Stroke ∗
FB FD FT FX FY FZ ZZ
ZZ + Stroke FT FX
(mm)
32
range
Up to 500 50 7 10 64 32 79 141
CA2
FZ
40 Up to 500 55 9 10 72 36 90 145
50 Up to 600 70 9 12 90 45 110 164 CS1
63 Up to 600 80 9 12 100 50 120 164
80 Up to 800 100 12 16 126 63 153 202 CS2
100 Up to 800 120 14 16 150 75 178 202
125 Up to 1000 138 14 20 180 102 216 237

Without
Single clevis style (C) Air Cushion
Bore size
(mm) Z ZZ
Cushion valve
Port 32 160 170.5
CDH10 40 164 175
50, 63 190 205
80, 100 238 261
Single Clevis Style 125 279 307
Bore size Stroke ∗
(mm) range L RR U CDH10 CX+0.3
+0.1 Z ZZ ∗
U 32 Up to 500 23 10.5 13 10 14 154 164.5
CX
L 40 Up to 500 23 11 13 10 14 158 169
Z + Stroke RR 50 Up to 600 30 15 17 14 20 182 197
ZZ + Stroke 63 Up to 600 30 15 17 14 20 182 197
80 Up to 800 42 23 26 22 30 228 251
100 Up to 800 42 23 26 22 30 228 251
125 Up to 1000 50 28 30 25 32 267 295

Cushion valve Port


Overall length of rod/head side flange, Without
single/double clevis, and method for
Double clevis style (D) longitudinal mounting
Air Cushion
CDH10 ∗ When there is no air cushion, the unit is Bore size
equipped with rubber bumpers. (mm) Z ZZ
Besides, the overall length is longer than the
cylinder with air cushion as follows, because
32 160 170.5
the bumpers are attached to the both sides of 40 164 175
the piston: ø32, ø40: +6 mm, ø50, ø63: +8 mm, 50, 63 190 205
ø80, ø100: +10 mm, ø125: +12 mm.
80, 100 238 261
U Double Clevis Style 125 279 307
L CX Bore size Stroke
Z∗ ZZ∗
Z + Stroke +0.3
RR L RR U CD H10 CX+0.1 CZ
ZZ + Stroke
CZ (mm)
32
range
Up to 500 23 10.5 13 10 14 28 154 164.5
D-쏔
40 Up to 500 23 11 13 10 14 28 158 169
50 Up to 600 30 15 17 14 20 40 182 197 -X쏔
63 Up to 600 30 15 17 14 20 40 182 197
Individual
80 Up to 800 42 23 26 22 30 60 228 251 -X쏔
100 Up to 800 42 23 26 22 30 60 228 251
Technical
125 Up to 1000 50 28 30 25 32 64 267 295
data
337
Series MB1
Pivot Bracket/Double Clevis Pivot Bracket

Type
Bore size
MB쏔32 MB쏔40 MB쏔50 MB쏔63 MB쏔80 MB쏔100 MB쏔125
Description
Double clevis pivot bracket MB-B03 MB-B05 MB-B08 MB-B12

Double clevis pivot bracket


Z + Stroke DB B
DX
DD

4 x øDT

B
DH
4 x øDR

DS
DU DL DU DO DC DO
DA DE

Without
(mm) Air Cushion
Z∗
Bore size Bore size
Part no. (mm) B DA DB DL DU DC DX DE DO DR DT DS DH DD H10 (mm) Z
32 46 42 32 22 10 44 14 62 9 6.6 15 7 33 154 10 +0.058
0 32 160
MB-B03
40 52 42 32 22 10 44 14 62 9 6.6 15 7 33 158 10 +0.058
0 40 164
50 65 53 43 30 11.5 60 20 81 10.5 9 18 8 45 182 14 +0.070
0 50 190
MB-B05
63 75 53 43 30 11.5 60 20 81 10.5 9 18 8 45 182 14 +0.070
0 63 190
80 95 73 64 45 14 86 30 111 12.5 11 22 10 65 228 22 +0.084
0 80 238
MB-B08
100 114 73 64 45 14 86 30 111 12.5 11 22 10 65 228 22 +0.084
0 100 238
MB-B12 125 136 90 78 60 15 110 32 136 13 13.5 24 14 75 267 25 +0.084
0 125 279

Rotating Angle
Bore size Method for longitudinal mounting of clevis pivot bracket
(mm)
∗ In the case of w/o air cushion, it comes with rubber bumper. Besides, the overall length is
32, 40 longer than the cylinder with air cushion as follows, because the bumpers are attached to
50, 63 the both sides of the piston: ø32, ø40: +6 mm, ø50, ø63: +8 mm, ø80, ø100: +10 mm,
80, 100 ø125: +12 mm.
125

338
Square Tube Type Air Cylinder: Standard Type
Double Acting, Single Rod Series MB1
Accessory Bracket Dimensions
Rod end nut Knuckle joint pin

øDd9
(Standard equipment) d Clevis pin 2 x ød

C
m l l
H B L

Bore size Bore size (mm) d


Part no. (mm) d H B C D Part no. Dd9 L l m (Drill through) Cotter pin

NT-03 32 M10 x 1.25 6 17 19.6 16.5 CD-M03 (1)


Clevis Knuckle
32, 40 – 0.040
10 – 0.076 44 36 4 3 ø3 x 18 l
CJ1
NT-04 40 M14 x 1.5 8 22 25.4 21 CD-M05 (1) 50, 63 14 –– 0.050
0.093 60 51 4.5 4 ø4 x 25 l
NT-05 50, 63 M18 x 1.5 11 27 31.2 26 CD-M08 (1)
– 0.065
80, 100 22 – 0.117 82 72 5 4 ø4 x 35 l CJP
– 0.065
NT-08 80 M22 x 1.5 13 32 37.0 31 IY-12 (2) 125 25 – 0.117 79.5 69.5 5 4 ø4 x 40 l
NT-10 100 M26 x 1.5 16 41 47.3 39 Note 1) Cotter pins and flat washers are included. CJ2
NT-12M 125 M27 x 2 16 41 47.3 39 Note 2) Only pins are included.
Y type double CM2
I type single Knuckle joint

R
MM NDH10 1

R
RR MM øNDH10

1
Knuckle joint
CG1
øE1

øE1

NX
NZ
A1
L1
U1 MB
A NX U1
L1
MB1
Bore size Bore size
Part no. (mm) A A1 E1 L1 MM R1 U1 NDH10 NX Part no. (mm) E1 L1 MM R1 U1 NDH10 NX NZ
CA2
I-03M 32 40 14 20 30 M10 x 1.25 12 16 10 + 0.058
0.0 14 –– 0.10
0.30 Y-03M (1) 32 20 30 M10 x 1.25 10 16 10 + 0.058
0.0 14 ++ 0.30
0.10 28 –– 0.10
0.30

I-04M 40 50 19 22 40 M14 x 1.5 12.5 19 10 + 0.058 14 –– 0.10 Y-04M (1)


40 22 40 M14 x 1.5 11 19 10 + 0.058 14 ++ 0.30 28 –– 0.10
I-05M 50, 63 64 24 28 50 M18 x 1.5 16.5 24
0.0

14 + 0.070
0.0
0.30

20 –– 0.10
0.30 Y-05M (1) 50, 63 28 50 M18 x 1.5 14 24 14 + 0.070
0.0

0.0
0.10

20 ++ 0.30
0.10
0.30

40 –– 0.10
0.30
CS1
I-08M 80 80 26 40 60 M22 x 1.5 23.5 34 22 + 0.084
0.0 30 –– 0.10
0.30 Y-08M (1) 80 40 65 M22 x 1.5 20 34 22 + 0.0840.0 30 ++ 0.30
0.10 60 –– 0.10
0.30

I-10M 100 80 26 40 60 M26 x 1.5 23.5 34 22 + 0.084


0.0 30 –– 0.10
0.30 Y-10M (1) 100 40 65 M26 x 1.5 20 34 22 + 0.0840.0 30 ++ 0.30
0.10 60 –– 0.10
0.30 CS2
+ 0.30
I-12M 125 119 36 46 92 M27 x 2 28.5 34 25 + 0.084
0.0 32 –– 0.10
0.30 Y-12M (1) 125 46 100 M27 x 2 27 42 25 + 0.084 0.0 32 + 0.10 64 –– 0.10
0.30

Note 1) Pins, cotter pins, and flat washers are included.


Note 2) Pins and cotter pins are included.
Bracket Combinations

Bracket Combinations Available··············· Refer to table together with combination drawings.


Support bracket for
work mounting side Single knuckle Double knuckle Clevis pivot
Cylinder Single clevis Double clevis
mounting bracket joint joint bracket
Single clevis
Double clevis
Single knuckle joint
Double knuckle joint

No. Appearance No. Appearance


Single clevis + Double clevis Single knuckle joint + Double knuckle joint

Single clevis + Double knuckle joint Double knuckle joint + Single clevis

Double clevis + Single clevis Double knuckle joint + Single knuckle joint

Double clevis + Single knuckle joint Double clevis + Clevis pivot bracket

D-쏔
-X쏔
Single knuckle joint + Double clevis Double knuckle joint + Clevis pivot bracket
Individual
-X쏔
Technical
data
339
Square Tube Type Air Cylinder: Standard Type
Double Acting, Double Rod

Series MB1W
ø32, ø40, ø50, ø63, ø80, ø100, ø125

How to Order

MB1W L 32 150
With auto switch MDB1W L 32 150 M9BW
Made to Order
With auto switch (Refer to page 342 for details.)
(Built-in magnet)

Mounting style Number of auto switches


B Basic style Nil 2 pcs.
L Foot style S 1 pc.
F Flange style 3 3 pcs.
n “n” pcs.

Bore size
Auto switch
32 32 mm
40 40 mm Nil Without auto switch
50 50 mm ∗ For the applicable auto switch part numbers,
refer to the table below.
63 63 mm
80 80 mm Port thread type
100 100 mm Nil Rc Suffix for cylinder
125 125 mm TN NPT Nil None
TF G J Nylon tarpaulin (One end)
Rod boot JJ Nylon tarpaulin (Both ends)
K Heat resistant tarpaulin (One end)
Cylinder stroke (mm) Heat resistant tarpaulin (Both ends)
KK
(Refer to page 341 for standard strokes.)
Nil Air cushion at both ends
Cushion
Built-in Magnet Cylinder Model N Note) Without air cushion
Note) In the case of w/o air cushion, it comes with rubber
If a built-in magnet cylinder without an auto bumper.
switch is required, there is no need to enter Besides, the overall length is longer than the cylinder
with air cushion as follows, because the bumpers are
the symbol for the auto switch. attached to the both sides of the piston: ø32, ø40: +6
(Example) MDB1WB40-100 mm, ø50, ø63: +8 mm, ø80, ø100: +10 mm, ø125:
+12 mm.
Applicable Auto Switch/Refer to pages 1263 to 1371 for further information on auto switches.
Lead wire length (m)
Indicator light

Load voltage Auto switch model


Electrical Wiring 0.5 1 3 5 Pre-wired Applicable load
Type Special function (Output) DC AC Perpendicular In-line
entry (Nil) (M) (L) (Z) connector
3-wire (NPN) M9NV M9N
5V, 12V IC circuit
Solid state switch

3-wire (PNP) M9PV M9P


2-wire 12V M9BV M9B —
3-wire (NPN) M9NWV M9NW
Diagnostic indication 5V, 12V IC circuit Relay,
Yes

Grommet 3-wire (PNP) 24V — M9PWV M9PW


(2-color indication) PLC
2-wire 12V M9BWV M9BW —
3-wire (NPN) M9NAV M9NA
Water resistant 5V, 12V IC circuit
3-wire (PNP) M9PAV M9PA
(2-color indication)
2-wire 12V M9BAV M9BA —
3-wire
— 5V — A96V A96 — — — —
switch

(NPN equivalent) IC circuit


Yes
Reed

Grommet
100V A93V A93 — — — — Relay,
2-wire 24V 12V
No

100V or less A90V A90 — — IC circuit PLC



∗ Lead wire length symbols: 0.5 m ·······Nil (Example) M9NW ∗ Solid state auto switches marked with “ ” are produced upon receipt of order.
1 m ······· M (Example) M9NWM
3 m ······· L (Example) M9NWL
5 m ······· Z (Example) M9NWZ
∗ Since there are other applicable auto switches than listed above, refer to page 350 for details.
∗ For details about auto switches with pre-wired connector, refer to pages 1328 and 1329.
∗ Auto switches are shipped together (not assembled).

340
Square Tube Type Air Cylinder: Standard Type
Double Acting, Double Rod Series MB1W
Specifications
Bore size (mm) 32 40 50 63 80 100 125
Action Double acting, Double rod
Fluid Air
Proof pressure 1.5 MPa
Maximum operating pressure 1.0 MPa
JIS Symbol Minimum operating pressure 0.05 MPa
Double acting
Ambient and fluid temperature
CJ1
Lubrication Not required (Non-lube)
Piston speed 50 to 1000 mm/s 50 to CJP
700 mm/s
+1.4
Stroke length tolerance Up to 250: +1.0
0 , 251 to 800: 0
Standard Stroke Note) Note)
CJ2
Cushion Both ends (Air cushion)
Bore size
(mm)
Standard stroke (mm) Port size (Rc, NPT, G) 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 CM2
Mounting Basic style, Foot style, Flange style
32
25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200,
250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500
Note) In the case of w/o air cushion, it comes with rubber bumper. CG1
Kinetic energy absorbable by the cushion mechanism is identical to double acting, single rod.

40
25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, MB
250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500
Accessory
25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, MB1
50 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600 Mounting Basic style Foot style Flange style
25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200,
CA2
63 Standard equipment Rod end nut
250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600
Single knuckle joint CS1
25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 250,
80 Option Double knuckle (With pin)
300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600, 700, 800
Rod boot CS2
25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 250,
100 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600, 700, 800

25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 250, 300, OUT
125 350, 400, 450, 500, 600, 700, 800, 1000 Theoretical Output IN (N)
Intermediate strokes are available, too. Bore size Rod size Operating Piston area Operating pressure (MPa)
(Spacer is not used.)
(mm) (mm) direction (mm2) 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0
32 12 IN/OUT 691 138 207 276 346 415 484 553 622 691
Rod Boot Material
40 16 IN/OUT 1056 211 317 422 528 634 739 845 950 1056
Symbol Rod boot material
50 20 IN/OUT 1649 330 495 660 825 989 1154 1319 1484 1649
J Nylon tarpaulin 63 20 IN/OUT 2803 561 841 1121 1402 1682 1962 2242 2523 2803

K Heat resistant tarpaulin 80 25 IN/OUT 4536 907 1361 1814 2268 2722 3175 3629 4082 4536
∗ Maximum ambient temperature for the rod boot 100 30 IN/OUT 7147 1429 2144 2859 3574 4288 5003 5718 6432 7147
itself.
125 32 IN/OUT 11468 2294 3440 4588 5734 6881 8028 9174 10321 11468
Mounting Bracket Part No. Note) Theoretical output (N) = Pressure (MPa) x Piston area (mm2)
Bore size
(mm)
32 40 50

Foot MB-L03 MB-L04 MB-L05 Mass (kg)


Flange MB-F03 MB-F04 MB-F05 Bore size (mm) 32 40 50 63 80 100 125
Basic style 0.59 0.82 1.39 1.72 3.22 4.27 6.68
Bore size
(mm)
63 80 100 Basic mass Foot style 0.71 0.96 1.61 2.0 3.72 4.93 8.76
Flange style 0.88 1.19 1.84 2.51 4.67 7.58 10.86
Foot MB-L06 MB-L08 MB-L10 Additional mass per
each 50 mm of stroke All mounting brackets 0.20 0.29 0.41 0.45 0.75 1.0 1.25
Flange MB-F06 MB-F08 MB-F10
Single knuckle 0.15 0.23 0.26 0.26 0.60 0.83 1.10
Bore size Accessory bracket
125 Double knuckle (With pin) 0.22 0.37 0.43 0.43 0.87 1.27 0.91
(mm)
Calculation:
Foot MB-L12 (Example) MB1WB32-100 (Basic style/ø32, 100 st)
Flange MB-F12 • Basic mass······················ 0.59 kg
Note) Order two foot brackets per cylinder. • Additional mass··············· 0.20/50 stroke
• Cylinder stroke·················100 stroke
0.59 + 0.20 x 100/50 = 0.99 kg
Refer to pages 349 and 350 for cylinders D-쏔
with auto switches.

Minimum auto switch mounting stroke -X쏔


Proper auto switch mounting position
Individual
(detection at stroke end) and mounting height -X쏔
Operating range
Switch mounting bracket: Part no. Technical
data
341
Series MB1W
Construction

!1e!3 y q t wr!4 !8!7!2!6 i u !5

Cylinder tube sectional view A-A´ A'


!0 o

Component Parts
No. Description Material Note No. Description Material Note

1 Rod cover Aluminum die-casted Metallic painted 12 Cushion seal Urethane

2 Cylinder tube Aluminum alloy Hard anodized 13 Rod seal NBR

3 Piston rod Carbon steel Hard chrome plated 14 Piston seal NBR
4 Piston Aluminum alloy Chromated 15 Cushion valve seal NBR

5 Cushion ring Brass 16 Cylinder tube gasket NBR
6 Bushing Lead-bronze casted 17 Piston gasket NBR
7 Cushion valve Steel wire Nickel plated 18 Piston holder Urethane
8 Retaining ring Spring steel ø40 to ø100
9 Tie-rod Carbon steel Zinc chromated
10 Tie-rod nut Carbon steel Nickel plated
11 Rod end nut Carbon steel Nickel plated

Replacement Parts/Seal Kit


Copper/Fluorine-free
Bore size
(mm) Kit no. Contents 20-MB1W Mounting style Bore size Port thread type Stroke Suffix
32 MBW32–PS Copper/fluorine-free
40 MBW40–PS The type which prevents copper based ions from generating by
50 MBW50–PS Set of the above nos. changing the copper based materials into non-copper materials in
63 MBW63–PS !2, !3, !4, !6 order to eliminate the effects by copper based ions or fluororesins
80 MBW80–PS over the color cathode ray tube.
100 MBW100–PS
Specifications
∗ Seal kit includes !2 to !4, !6. Order the seal kit, based on each bore size.
Action Double acting, Double rod
∗ Seal kit includes a grease pack (ø32 to 50: 10 g, ø63, 80: 20 g, ø100: 30 g).
Bore size ø32, ø40, ø50, ø63, ø80, ø100
Order with the following part number when only the grease pack is needed.
Grease pack part number: GR-S-010 (10 g), GR-S-020 (20 g) Max. operating pressure 1.0 MPa
Min. operating pressure 0.05 MPa
Cushion Air cushion ∗
Piping Screw-in type
Piston speed 50 to 1000 mm/s
Basic style, Axial foot style, Rod side flange style
Made to Order Specifications Mounting Head side flange style, Single clevis style
(For details, refer to pages 1395 to 1498.)
Double clevis style, Center trunnion style
Symbol Specifications ∗ Auto switch can be mounted.
∗ Use within the energy absorption. (Refer to page 334.)
—XA쏔 Change of rod end shape ∗ When there is no air cushion, the unit is equipped with rubber bumpers.
—XB6 Heat resistant cylinder (150 )
—XC3 Special port location Water Resistant Air Cylinders
—XC4 With heavy duty scraper As compared to the standard cylinder, anti-coolant performance has been
—XC5 Heat resistant cylinder (110 ) improved, and suitable for using under the atmosphere having coolant in the
—XC6 Piston rod and rod end nut made of stainless steel machine tools. Improved water resistant air cylinder, Series MB is also
available, which is compliant for the environment having water splashed on the
—XC7 Tie-rod, cushion valve, tie rod nut, etc. made of stainless steel
food machinery, or car washing machine, etc. Refer to page 899 for details.
—XC22 Fluororubber seals
—XC30 Rod side trunnion
—XC35 With coil scraper
—X846 Fastener strips mounted on switch mounting grooves

342
Square Tube Type Air Cylinder: Standard Type
Double Acting, Double Rod Series MB1W
Standard Type
VW Cushion valve
Basic style: (B) G 2xP G MM Port
MM

øE

øD
øD
øE
øe

C
B
ød

H1
H1
Effective
MB Effective
10.2 thread 16
thread
10.2 l f A K F 2x4xJ N F K A C
N
h
H S + Stroke H + Stroke B
CJ1
With rod boot ZZ + 2 strokes
CJP
∗ In the case of w/o air cushion, it comes with MM G 2xP G MM
rubber bumper.
Besides, the overall length is longer than the CJ2
cylinder with air cushion as follows, because
the bumpers are attached to the both sides of

øD
øD

øe
øe

the piston: ø32, ø40: +6 mm, ø50, ø63: +8 mm,


ø80, ø100: +10 mm, ø125: +12 mm.
CM2
∗∗ In the case of w/o air cushion, it comes with
rubber bumper. Effective Effective
Besides, the overall length is longer than the thread 10.2 10.2 thread CG1
cylinder with air cushion as follows, because A K 10.2 l f N N f l + Stroke 10.2 K A
the bumpers are attached to the both sides of
the piston: ø32, ø40: +3 mm, ø50, ø63: +4 mm,
ø80, ø100: +5 mm, ø125: +6 mm (In the case of
h S + Stroke
ZZ + 2 Stroke
h + Stroke
MB
trunnion style and trunnion pivot bracket). Without
Air MB1
Cushion
Bore size Stroke Effective Width
(mm) range
thread across
length flats
A B C D Ee11 F G H1 H MA MB J K MM N P S∗ V W ZZ ∗ S ZZ CA2
32 Up to 500 19.5 10 22 46 32.5 12 30 13 13 6 47 16 4 M6 x 1 6 M10 x 1.25 26.5 1/8 84 4 6.5 178 90 184
40 Up to 500 27 14 30 52 38 16 35 13 14 8 51 16 4 M6 x 1 6 M14 x 1.5 26.5 1/4 84 4 9 186 90 192 CS1
50 Up to 600 32 18 35 65 46.5 20 40 14 15.5 11 58 16 5 M8 x 1.25 7 M18 x 1.5 31 1/4 94 5 10.5 210 102 218
63 Up to 600 32 18 35 75 56.5 20 45 14 16.5 11 58 16 5 M8 x 1.25 7 M18 x 1.5 31 3/8 94 9 12 210 102 218 CS2
80 Up to 800 37 22 40 95 72 25 45 20 19 13 72 16 5 M10 x 1.5 10 M22 x 1.5 37.5 3/8 114 11.5 14 258 124 268
100 Up to 800 37 26 40 114 89 30 55 20 19 16 72 16 5 M10 x 1.5 10 M26 x 1.5 37.5 1/2 114 17 15 258 124 268
125 Up to 1000 50 27 54 136 110 32 60 27 19 16 97 20 6 M12 x 1.75 13 M27 x 2.0 38 1/2 120 17 15 314 132 316

With Rod Boot


Bore l h
size d e f 1 to 51 to 101 151 201 301 401 501 601 701 801 901 1 to 51 to 101 151 201 301 401 501 601 701 801 901
(mm) 50 to
100 150 to to to to to to to to to 50 to
100 150 to to to to to to to to to
200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000
32 54 36 23 12.5 25 37.5 50 75 100 125 — — — — — 73 86 98 111 136 161 186 — — — — —
40 56 41 23 12.5 25 37.5 50 75 100 125 — — — — — 81 94 106 119 144 169 194 — — — — —
50 64 51 25 12.5 25 37.5 50 75 100 125 150 — — — — 89 102 114 127 152 177 202 227 — — — —
63 64 51 25 12.5 25 37.5 50 75 100 125 150 — — — — 89 102 114 127 152 177 202 227 — — — —
80 68 56 29 12.5 25 37.5 50 75 100 125 150 175 200 — — 101 114 126 139 164 189 214 239 264 276 — —
100 76 61 29 12.5 25 37.5 50 75 100 125 150 175 200 — — 101 114 126 139 164 189 214 239 264 276 — —
125 82 75 27 10 20 30 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 120 130 140 150 170 190 210 230 250 270 290 310

Note) ZZ indicates dimensions for double side rod boot.


Bore ZZ Note)
size 1 to 51 to 101 151 201 301 401 501 601 701 801 901
(mm) 50 100 150 to to to to to to to to to to
200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000
32 230 256 280 306 356 406 456 — — — — —
40 246 272 296 322 372 422 472 — — — — —
50 272 298 322 348 398 448 498 548 — — — —
63 272 298 322 348 398 448 498 548 — — — —
80 316 342 366 392 442 492 542 592 642 692 — —
100 316 342 366 392 442 492 542 592 642 692 — —
125 340 360 380 400 440 480 520 560 600 640 680 720

D-쏔
-X쏔
Individual
-X쏔
Technical
data
343
Series MB1W
Standard Type: With Mounting Bracket ∗ Dimensions not indicated are the same as the standard type (page 343).

Foot Style
Foot style (L) Port Cushion valve
Bore size Stroke ∗
range
X Y LD LH LS LT LX LY LZ
(mm)
32 Up to 500 22 9 7 30 128 3.2 32 53 50
40 Up to 500 24 11 9 33 132 3.2 38 59 55

LY
50 Up to 600 27 11 9 40 148 3.2 46 72.5 70

LH
4 x øLD
LT

63 Up to 600 27 14 12 45 148 3.6 56 82.5 80


80 Up to 800 30 14 12 55 174 4.5 72 102.5 100
Y X X Y LX
LS + Stroke 100 Up to 800 32 16 14 65 178 4.5 89 122 120
LZ 125 Up to 1000 45 20 14 81 210 8 90 149 136

Port Cushion valve Rod Side Flange Style


Rod side flange style (F)
4 x øFD Bore size Stroke
(mm) range FB FD FT FX FY FZ Fd
32 Up to 500 50 7 10 64 32 79 25
øFd

FB
FY
40 Up to 500 55 9 10 72 36 90 31
50 Up to 600 70 9 12 90 45 110 38.5
63 Up to 600 80 9 12 100 50 120 39.5
FE FT FX 80 Up to 800 100 12 16 126 63 153 45.5
FZ 100 Up to 800 120 14 16 150 75 178 54
125 Up to 1000 138 14 20 180 102 216 57.5

344
Square Tube Type Air Cylinder: Non-rotating Rod
Double acting, Single Rod

Series MB1K
ø32, ø40, ø50, ø63, ø80, ø100

How to Order CJ1


CJP
MB1K L 32 50
CJ2
With auto switch MDB1K L 32 50 M9BW CM2
Made to Order CG1
With auto switch (Refer to page 346 for details.)
(Built-in magnet)
MB
Mounting style
B Basic style
Axial foot style Number of auto switches MB1
L
F Rod side flange style Nil 2 pcs.
G Head side flange style S 1 pc. CA2
C Single clevis style 3 3 pcs.
D Double clevis style n “n” pcs. CS1
Bore size Auto switch CS2
32 32 mm Nil Without auto switch
40 40 mm ∗ For the applicable auto switch part numbers,
50 50 mm refer to the table below.
63 63 mm
80 80 mm Suffix for cylinder
100 100 mm Nil None
Rod boot J Nylon tarpaulin
Port thread type
K Heat resistant tarpaulin
Nil Rc
Nil Air cushion at both ends
TN NPT Cylinder stroke (mm) Cushion
(Refer to page 346 for standard strokes.) N Note) Without air cushion
TF G
Note) In the case of w/o air cushion, it comes with
rubber bumper.
Built-in Magnet Cylinder Model Besides, the overall length is longer than the
cylinder with air cushion as follows, because
If a built-in magnet cylinder without an auto the bumpers are attached to the both sides of
switch is required, there is no need to enter the piston: ø32, ø40: +6 mm, ø50, ø63: +8 mm,
the symbol for the auto switch. ø80, ø100: +10 mm.
(Example) MDB1KB40-100

Applicable Auto Switch/Refer to pages 1263 to 1371 for further information on auto switches.
Lead wire length (m)
Indicator light

Load voltage Auto switch model


Electrical Wiring 0.5 1 3 5 Pre-wired Applicable load
Type Special function (Output) DC AC Perpendicular In-line
entry (Nil) (M) (L) (Z) connector
3-wire (NPN) M9NV M9N
5V, 12V IC circuit
Solid state switch

3-wire (PNP) M9PV M9P


2-wire 12V M9BV M9B —
3-wire (NPN) M9NWV M9NW
Diagnostic indication 5V, 12V IC circuit Relay,
Yes

Grommet 3-wire (PNP) 24V — M9PWV M9PW


(2-color indication) PLC
2-wire 12V M9BWV M9BW —
3-wire (NPN) M9NAV M9NA
Water resistant 5V, 12V IC circuit
3-wire (PNP) M9PAV M9PA
(2-color indication)
2-wire 12V M9BAV M9BA —
3-wire
— 5V — A96V A96 — — — —
switch

(NPN equivalent) IC circuit


Yes
Reed

Grommet
2-wire 24V 12V
100V A93V A93 — — — — Relay, D-쏔
No

100V or less A90V A90 — — IC circuit PLC



∗ Lead wire length symbols: 0.5 m ·······Nil (Example) M9NW ∗ Solid state auto switches marked with “ ” are produced upon receipt of order. -X쏔
1 m ······· M (Example) M9NWM
3 m ······· L (Example) M9NWL Individual
5 m ······· Z (Example) M9NWZ -X쏔
∗ Since there are other applicable auto switches than listed above, refer to page 350 for details.
∗ For details about auto switches with pre-wired connector, refer to pages 1328 and 1329. Technical
∗ Auto switches are shipped together (not assembled). data
345
Series MB1K
Specifications
Bore size (mm) 32 40 50 63 80 100
Action Double acting, Single rod
Fluid Air
Proof pressure 1.5 MPa
Maximum operating pressure 1.0 MPa
Minimum operating pressure 0.05 MPa

Ambient and fluid temperature

Lubrication Not required (Non-lube)


JIS Symbol
Piston speed 50 to 1000 mm/s
Note)
Stroke length tolerance Up to 250:+1.0 +1.4 +1.8
0 , 251 to 1000: 0 , 1001 to 1500: 0

Cushion Both ends (Air cushion) Note)


Port size (Rc, NPT, G) 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2

Made to Order Specifications Mounting


Basic style, Foot style, Rod side flange style, Head side flange style
(For details, refer to pages 1373 to 1565.) Single clevis style, Double clevis style

Symbol Specifications
ø32, ø40
—XA쏔 Change of rod end shape
Rod non-rotating accuracy ø50, ø63
—XC3 Special port location ø80, ø100
—XC6 Piston rod and rod end nut made of stainless steel ø32 0.25 ø80 0.79
Tie-rod, cushion valve, tie rod nut, etc. Allowable rotational torque
—XC7 ø40 0.45 ø100 0.93
made of stainless steel (N·m or less)
—XC8
ø50, ø63 0.64 — —
Adjustable stroke cylinder/Adjustable extension type
Note) In the case of w/o air cushion, it comes with rubber bumper.
—XC9 Adjustable stroke cylinder/Adjustable retraction type
Kinetic energy absorbable by the cushion mechanism is identical to double acting, single rod.
—XC10 Dual stroke cylinder/Double rod type

—XC27 Double clevis pin and double knuckle pin Accessory


made of stainless steel
—XC30 Rod side trunnion Basic Foot Rod side Head side Single Double
Mounting
—X846 Fastener strips mounted on switch mounting grooves
style style Flange style flange style clevis style clevis style

Standard Rod end nut


equipment Clevis pin
Single knuckle joint
Mounting Bracket Part No.
Double knuckle joint
Bore size Option
32 40 50 (With pin)
(mm)
Foot (1)
MB-L03 MB-L04 MB-L05 Rod boot
Flange MB-F03 MB-F04 MB-F05
Single clevis MB-C03 MB-C04 MB-C05
Double clevis MB-D03 MB-D04 MB-D05 Standard Stroke Rod Boot Material
Bore size Symbol Rod boot material
Bore size Standard stroke (mm)
(mm)
63 80 100 (mm) J Nylon tarpaulin
Foot (1)
MB-L06 MB-L08 MB-L10 K Heat resistant tarpaulin ∗
25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200,
32
Flange MB-F06 MB-F08 MB-F10 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500 ∗ Maximum ambient temperature for the rod boot itself.
Single clevis MB-C06 MB-C08 MB-C10
25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200,
Double clevis MB-D06 MB-D08 MB-D10 40 Theoretical Output
250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500
Note 1) Order two foot brackets per cylinder.
Note 2) Accessories for each mounting bracket are 25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, OUT side is the same value as double acting,
50 single rod. But, IN side is different. For IN side,
as follows: Foot, flange, single clevis/body 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600
mounting bolt, double clevis/body mounting refer to the table below.
bolt, clevis pins, cotter pins and flat washer. 25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200,
63 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600 Bore size Piston area Bore size Piston area
Refer to page 339 for details.
(mm) (mm2) (mm) (mm2)
25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 250, 32 63
80 675 2804
300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600, 700, 800
40 1082 80 4568
Refer to pages 349 and 350 for cylinders
with auto switches.
25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 250, 50 1651 100 7223
100 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600, 700, 800
Minimum auto switch mounting stroke Intermediate strokes are available, too.
Proper auto switch mounting position (Spacer is not used.)
(detection at stroke end) and mounting height
Operating range
Switch mounting bracket: Part no.

346
Square Tube Type Air Cylinder: Non-rotating Rod Type
Double Acting, Single Rod Series MB1K
Mass (kg)
Bore size (mm) 32 40 50 63 80 100
Basic style 0.53 0.69 1.26 1.58 2.69 3.86
Foot style 0.65 0.83 1.48 1.86 3.19 4.52
Basic mass Flange style 0.82 1.06 1.69 2.37 4.14 7.17
Single clevis style 0.78 0.92 1.60 2.21 3.8 7.03
Double clevis style 0.79 0.96 1.69 2.37 4.09 7.55
Additional mass per
All mounting brackets 0.16 0.21 0.33 0.37 0.56 0.72
each 50 mm of stroke
Single knuckle 0.15 0.23 0.26 0.26 0.60 0.83 CJ1
Accessory bracket
Double knuckle (With pin) 0.22 0.37 0.43 0.43 0.87 1.27
Calculation: CJP
(Example) MB1K32-100 (Basic style/ø32, 100 st)
쎲 Basic mass·····················0.53 kg CJ2
쎲 Additional mass··············0.16/50 stroke
쎲 Cylinder stroke···············100 stroke
0.53 + 0.16 x 100/50 = 0.85 kg CM2
CG1
Construction
MB
MB1

∗1
CA2
∗ 1 MBK32 only CS1
A
CS2

Rod sectional A'


view A-A'

Component Parts
No. Description Material Note No. Description Material Note
1 Rod cover Aluminum die-casted Metallic painted 13 Piston nut Rolled steel
2 Head cover Aluminum die-casted Metallic painted 14 Spring washer Steel wire
3 Cylinder tube Aluminum alloy Hard anodized 15 Set screw Steel wire
4 Piston rod Stainless steel 16 Rod end nut Carbon steel Nickel plated
5 Piston Aluminum alloy Chromated 17 Wear ring Resin
6 Cushion ring A Rolled steel 18 ∗ Cushion seal Urethane
7 Cushion ring B Rolled steel 19 ∗ Rod seal NBR
8 Non-rotating guide Oil-impregnated sintered alloy 20 ∗ Piston seal NBR
9 Cushion valve Steel wire Nickel plated 21 Cushion valve seal NBR
10 Retaining ring Spring steel ø40 to ø100 22 ∗ Cylinder tube gasket NBR
11 Tie-rod Carbon steel Zinc chromated 23 Piston gasket NBR
12 Tie-rod nut Carbon steel Nickel plated
Replacement Parts/Seal Kit
Bore size
(mm) Kit no. Contents

32 MBK32 — PS
40 MBK40 — PS
50 MBK50 — PS Set of the above nos.
63 MBK63 — PS , , ,
80 MBK80 — PS
100 MBK100 — PS
∗ Seal kit includes 18 to 20, 22. Order the seal kit, based on each bore size.
∗ Seal kit includes a grease pack (ø32 to 50 : 10 g, ø63, 80 : 20 g, ø100 : 30 g).
D-쏔
Order with the following part number when only the grease pack is needed.
Grease pack part number : GR-S-010 (10 g), GR-S-020 (20 g) -X쏔
∗ In the case of w/o air cushion, it comes with rubber bumper. Individual
Besides, the overall length is longer than the cylinder with air cushion as follows, because the bumpers are attached to the both sides of the piston: ø32, ø40: +6 -X쏔
mm, ø50, ø63: +8 mm, ø80, ø100: +10 mm. Technical
data
347
Series MB1K
Standard Type

Basic style: (B)

G 2xP G Cushion valve WV Port


B
MM

11
Ee
across flats
Width

B
C
Rod sectional view H1

Effective MB B'
thread 16 2x4xJ
A F N N
H S + Stroke C
ZZ + Stroke B

Cylinder tube sectional view B-B´

Bore size Stroke Effective thread Width


(mm) range length across flats A B C E F G H1 MB J MM N P S V W H ZZ
32 Up to 500 19.5 12.2 22 46 32.5 30 13 13 6 4 M6 x 1 M10 x 1.25 26.5 1/8 84 4 6.5 47 135
40 Up to 500 27 14.2 30 52 38 35 13 14 8 4 M6 x 1 M14 x 1.5 26.5 1/4 84 4 9 51 139
50 Up to 600 32 19 35 65 46.5 40 14 15.5 11 5 M8 x 1.25 M18 x 1.5 31 1/4 94 5 10.5 58 156
63 Up to 600 32 19 35 75 56.5 45 14 16.5 11 5 M8 x 1.25 M18 x 1.5 31 3/8 94 9 12 58 156
80 Up to 800 37 23 40 95 72 45 20 19 13 5 M10 x 1.5 M22 x 1.5 37.5 3/8 114 11.5 14 72 190
100 Up to 800 37 27 40 114 89 55 20 19 16 5 M10 x 1.5 M26 x 1.5 37.5 1/2 114 17 15 72 190

348
Square Tube Type Air Cylinder Series MB1
Minimum Auto Switch Mounting Stroke
(mm)
Auto switch model No. of auto switch mounted ø32 ø40 ø50 ø63 ø80 ø100 ø125
2 (Different surfaces, Same surface) 15
D-A9쏔
1 15 10
D-A9쏔V
n 15 + 10 (n – 2) 15 + 15 (n – 2) 15 + 20 (n – 2)
2 (Different surfaces, Same surface) 15 10
D-M9쏔
1 15 10
D-M9쏔V
n 15 + 5 (n – 2) 10 + 10 (n – 2)
D-M9쏔W
CJ1
2 (Different surfaces, Same surface) 15 10
D-M9쏔WV 1 15 10
D-M9쏔AL CJP
D-M9쏔AVL n 15 + 10 (n – 2) 10 + 10 (n – 2) 10 + 15 (n – 2)
2 (Different surfaces, Same surface) 25 15
D-Z7쏔 CJ2
1 25 15
D-Z80
n 25 + 15 (n – 2) 15 + 15 (n – 2) 15 + 20 (n – 2)
CM2
2 (Different surfaces, Same surface) 25 15
D-Y59쏔 /Y69쏔
1 25 15
D-Y7P/Y7PV
15 + 10 (n – 2) 15 + 15 (n – 2)
CG1
n 25 + 10 (n – 2)
2 (Different surfaces, Same surface) 25 20
D-Y7쏔W MB
1 25 20
D-Y7쏔WV
n 25 + 10 (n – 2) 20 + 10 (n – 2) 20 + 15 (n – 2)
MB1
2 (Different surfaces, Same surface) 30 20
D-Y7BAL 1 30 20
20 + 10 (n – 2) 20 + 15 (n – 2)
CA2
n 30 + 10 (n – 2)
Note 1) n = 3, 4, 5 ···
Note 2) Center trunnion type is not included. CS1
CS2
Proper Auto Switch Mounting Position (Detection at stroke end) and Mounting Height

Auto Switch
1Note)

A B Hs

Proper Auto Switch Mounting Position (mm) Auto Switch Mounting Height (mm)
Auto switch
model
D-M9쏔 D-Z7쏔 / Z80
Auto switch
model
D-M9쏔V D-A9쏔V
D-Y59쏔 / Y69쏔 D-M9쏔V
D-M9쏔W D-A9쏔 D-Y69쏔
D-M9쏔WV D-Y7P/ Y7PV D-M9쏔WV
D-A9쏔V D-Y7쏔W/ Y7쏔WV D-Y7PV
D-M9쏔AL D-M9쏔AVL
D-Y7BAL D-Y7쏔WV
D-M9쏔AVL
Bore size A B A B A B Bore size Hs Hs
32 9 6 5 2 4 1 32 27 30
40 9 6 5 2 4 1 40 30 33
50 9 7 5 3 4 2 50 36 39
63 9 7 5 3 4 2 63 41 44
80 12.5 10.5 8.5 6.5 7.5 5.5 80 51 54
100 12.5 10.5 8.5 6.5 7.5 5.5 100 60.5 63.5
125 14.5 14.5 10.5 10.5 9.5 9.5 125 71.5 74.5
Note) Adjust the auto switch after confirming the operation to set actually. Note) The above figures are for when the electrical entry in-line
types D-A9쏔/M9쏔/M9쏔W/M9쏔AL/Z7쏔/Z80/Y59쏔/Y7P/
Y7쏔W/Y7BAL are mounted.
D-쏔
-X쏔
Individual
-X쏔
Technical
data
349
Series MB1
Operating Range Switch Mounting Bracket: Part No.
(mm)
Bore size Bore size (mm)
Auto switch model Auto switch model
32 40 50 63 80 100 125 ø32 to ø125
D-A9쏔 / A9쏔V 7 7.5 8 9 9.5 10.5 12.5 D-A9쏔 / A9쏔V Note)
D-M9쏔 / M9쏔V D-M9쏔 / M9쏔V BMP1-032
D-M9쏔W / M9쏔WV 4 4.5 5 6 6 6 7 D-M9쏔W / M9쏔WV BMG2-012
D-M9쏔AL / M9쏔AVL D-M9쏔AL / M9쏔AVL
D-Z7쏔Z80 10 10 10 11 11 12 14 D-Z7쏔 / Z80
D-Y59쏔 / Y69쏔 D-Y5쏔 / Y7P
D-Y7P / Y7PV D-Y7쏔W
BMP1-032
D-Y7쏔W / Y7쏔WV
6.5 6.5 6 7 7 8 7 D-Y6쏔 / Y7PV
D-Y7BAL D-Y7쏔WV
D-Y7BAL
Note) Two kinds of auto switch brackets are used as a set.

D-A9쏔 (V) / M9쏔 (V) / M9쏔W (V) / M9쏔A (V) L


BMP1-032

BMG2-012

Besides the models listed in How to Order, the following auto switches are applicable.
Refer to pages 1263 to 1371 for the detailed specifications.
Auto switch type Part no. Electrical entry (Entry direction) Features
D-Z73, Z76 –
Reed Grommet (in-line)
D-Z80 With indicator light
D-Y69A, Y69B, Y7PV –
Grommet (perpendicular)
D-Y7NWV, Y7PWV, Y7BWV Diagnosis indication (2 colors)
Sold state
D-Y59A, Y59B, Y7P –
Grommet (in-line)
D-Y7NW, Y7PW, Y7BW Diagnosis indication (2 colors)
∗ For solid state switches, auto switches with a pre-wired connector are also available. Refer to pages 1328 and 1329 for details.
∗ Normally closed (NC = b contact) solid state auto switches (D-F9G/F9H/Y7G/Y7H types) are also available. Refer to pages 1290 and 1292 for details.

350
Series MB1
Specific Product Precautions
Be sure to read before handling.
Refer to front matters 54 and 55 for Safety Instructions and pages 3 to 11 for Actuator
and Auto Switch Precautions.

Adjustment Non-rotating rod type (Double acting, Single rod)

Warning Operating Precautions


1. Do not open the cushion valve beyond the stopper.
Crimping (ø32) or a snap ring (ø40 to ø100) is provided to
Caution CJ1
prevent the accidental removal of the cushion valve. Do not 1. Avoid using the air cylinder in such a way that more
open the valve beyond the mechanism. than allowable rotational torque would be applied CJP
If not operated in accordance with the above precautions, the to the piston rod.
cushion valve may be ejected from the cover when air If rotational torque is applied, the non-rotating guide will CJ2
pressure is supplied. deform, thus affecting the non-rotating accuracy. This may

Bore size (mm) Cushion valve width across flats Hexagon wrench
cause damage to machinery. CM2
32, 40 2.5 JIS 4648 Hexagon wrench key 2.5
CG1
50, 63 3 JIS 4648 Hexagon wrench key 3
80, 100 4 JIS 4648 Hexagon wrench key 4
Mounting/Piping
MB
125 4 JIS 4648 Hexagon wrench key 4
MB1
2. Use the air cushion at the end of cylinder stroke. Caution
When it is intended to use the cushion valve in the fully open 1. Mounting a workpiece on rod end CA2
position, select the type with damper. If this is not done, the To screw a bracket or a nut onto the threaded portion at the
tie-rods or piston rod assembly will be damaged. tip of the piston rod, make sure to retract the piston rod CS1
entirely, and place a wrench over the flat portion of the rod
3. When replacing mounting bracket, use a hexagon
that protrudes.
wrench. Tighten it by giving consideration to prevent the tightening
CS2
Bore size (mm) Bolt Width across flats Tightening torque (N·m) torque from being applied to the non-rotating guide.
32, 40 MB-32-48-C1247 4 5.1
50, 63 MB-50-48-C1249 5 11

80, Foot MB-80-48AC1251


6 25
100 Others MB-80-48BC1251
Foot M12 x 1.75 x 25L
125 8 30.1
Others M12 x 1.75 x 28L

4. When replacing a bracket, tie-rod nuts on the


cylinder body may become loosened.
After retightening the tie-rod nuts with the proper tightening
torque (Refer to Adjustment 3.), mount a mounting bracket.

D-쏔
-X쏔
Individual
-X쏔
Technical
data
351
P0669-P0756-E.qxd 08.11.17 3:01 PM Page 693

Cylinder with Lock


Series MNB
ø32, ø40, ø50, ø63, ø80, ø100
A locking cylinder ideal for intermediate stops,
emergency stops and drop prevention. CLJ2
Simple construction Maximum piston speed: 1000 mm/s CLM2
A force magnifying mechanism is employed based on It can be used at 50 to 1000 mm/s provided that it is within the
the wedge effect of the taper ring and steel balls. allowable kinetic energy range. CLG1
Steel ball Taper ring
CL1
P

f
MLGC
R R CNG
MNB
CNA
CNS
CLS
CLQ
RLQ
MLU
Manual override for unlocking
Even if the air supply is blocked or exhausted, lock release is MLGP
possible.
The fail safe mechanism locks again when the manual override ML1C
is released.

High locking efficiency


Greater locking efficiency as well as stable locking and unlocking
operation has been achieved by arranging a large number of steel ball
bearings in circular rows. (Unlocking pressure of 0.25 MPa ······ 0.05
MPa lower than conventional SMC products) In addition, both
alignability and stable locking force with respect to piston rod
eccentricity are obtained by allowing the taper ring to float.

High reliability and


stable holding force
Outstanding durability and stable holding force are maintained by the Design minimizes the influences
use of a brake shoe having superior wear resistance, which has also
been substantially lengthened (double the conventional SMC of unlocking air quality
product). A construction which is strong against moisture and drainage in the
compressed air has been realized by separating the locking
mechanism and the unlocking chamber.
 Series Variations
Standard Lock
holding Max.
variations Bore size

Can be locked in both directions D-


Series Action Type force stroke
(mm) (mm)
With rod boot (N)

An equal holding force can be obtained on either


Single rod
32 552 700
reciprocating stroke of the cylinder. -X
Series 40 882 800
Cylinder Individual
Double MNB 50 1370
with lock 1000
Series
acting
63 2160 -X
Double rod
MNB Series 80 3430
MNBW 1000
100 5390

693
P0669-P0756-E.qxd 08.11.17 3:01 PM Page 694

Series MNB
Model Selection
Precautions on Model Selection Step (1) Find the maximum load speed V.

Caution Find the maximum load speed: V (mm/s) from the load movement
time: t (s) and the movement distance: st (mm).
1. In order that the originally selected maximum speed shall not
be exceeded, be certain to use a speed controller to adjust the
total movement distance of the load so that movement takes Graph (1)
10 700
place in no less than the applicable movement time. 600 sst t
The movement time is the time that is necessary for the load to 500sst t
sst
travel the total movement distance from the start without any 400 t
5 sst t
intermediate stops. 4
300
sst t
2. In cases where the cylinder stroke and the movement distance
3 20
of the load are different (double speed mechanism, etc.), use 0 sst t

Load movement time: t (S)


the movement distance of the load for selection purposes. 2
[Example]
100
sst t
Example) 1

0.5
0.4
0.3
V'
0.2

V W
0.1
100 200 300 400 500 1000
Cylinder Maximum speed: V (mm/s)
Movement distance
stroke
of load

Step (2) Find the bore size.


3. The following selection example and procedures are based on
use at the intermediate stop (including emergency stops during
operation). However, when the cylinder is in a locked state, Select a graph based upon the load condition and operating
kinetic energy does not act upon it. Under these conditions, pressure, and then find the point of intersection for the maximum
use the load mass at the maximum speed (V) of 100 mm/s speed found in Step (1) and the load mass. Select the bore size
shown in graphs (5) to (7) on page 695 depending on the on the above the point of intersection.
operating pressure and select models. Load Condition Operating pressure
Load in the direction at the right
angle to rod
Selection Example (∗ Being held by a guide)

• Load mass : m = 50 kg
• Movement distance : st = 500 mm 0.3MPa ≤ Graph (2)
• Movement time :t=2s
• Load condition : Vertical downward = Load in direction of
rod extension m 0.4 MPa ≤ Graph (3)
• Operating pressure : P = 0.4 MPa
F
Step (1): From graph (1) find the maximum movement speed of 0.5 MPa ≤ Graph (4)
the load
∴ Maximum speed V: ≅ 350 mm/s.
Load in the direction of rod extension
Step (2): Select graph (6) based upon the load conditions and Load in the direction of rod retraction
operating pressure, and then from the intersection of
the maximum speed V = 350 mm/s found in Step (1), m 0.3 MPa ≤ Graph (5)
and the load mass m = 50 kg.
∴ ø63 select a MNB63 or larger bore size. F
0.4 MPa ≤ Graph (6)

m
0.5 MPa ≤ Graph (7)
F
694
P0669-P0756-E.qxd 08.11.17 3:01 PM Page 695

Cylinder with Lock Series MNB


Selection Graph

Graph (2)    P   Graph (5)    P  
 

 
  
ø100 
 
ø80 
 

ø63  
ø100
 
ø50  
ø80 CLJ2

  m 

  m 


ø40 
ø63
 
 
ø32  
ø50 CLM2
 

ø40
 

ø32 CLG1
 
CL1
 
 
  MLGC
 
CNG
           

 V   
 V   MNB

Graph (3)    P   Graph (6)    P  
CNA
 
 
ø100 CNS
 
 
ø80 


 CLS

ø63  
 ø100

ø50 
ø80 CLQ
 
ø40  
ø63
  m 

  m 


ø32 
ø50 RLQ
 
  
ø40
 
  
ø32 MLU
!"  #$
  MLGP
 
  ML1C
 
 

           

 V   
 V  

Graph (4)    P Graph (7)    P


 ø100
  

 
ø80 
 
 
ø63  
 ø100
 
ø50 
 ø80

ø40 
ø63
 

ø32 
ø50
  m 

  m 

  
ø40
 
 
 ø32
 

 

  D-
 
 
 
-X
Individual
-X
           

 V   
 V  

%
P0669-P0756-E.qxd 08.11.17 3:01 PM Page 696

Cylinder with Lock


Double Acting, Single Rod

Series MNB
ø32, ø40, ø50, ø63, ø80, ø100

How to Order

MNB L 50 100 D
With auto switch MDNB L 50 100 D M9BW
With auto switch
(Built-in magnet) Made to Order
Refer to page 697 for
Mounting style details.
B Basic style Bore size Number of auto switch
L Axial foot style
32 32 mm Nil 2 pcs.
F Rod side flange style 40 40 mm S 1 pc.
G Head side flange style 50 50 mm n “n” pcs.
C Single clevis style
63 63 mm
D Double clevis style Auto switch
80 80 mm
Locking Nil Without auto switch
100 100 mm
direction ∗ For the applicable auto switch model,
Built-in Magnet Cylinder Model Port thread type Both refer to the table below.
D directions
If a built-in magnet cylinder without an auto Nil Rc
switch is required, there is no need to enter TN NPT
the symbol for the auto switch. With rod boot
TF G
(Example) MDNBL40-100-D Nil None
Cylinder stroke (mm) Rod boot J Nylon tarpaulin
Refer to page 697 for the standard stroke. K Heat resistant tarpaulin

Applicable Auto Switch/Refer to pages 1719 to 1827 for further information on auto switches.
Load voltage Auto switch model Lead wire length (m)
Indicator

Electrical Wiring Pre-wired Applicable


light

Type Special function Tie-rod Band 0.5 1 3 5


entry (Output) DC AC connector load
mounting mounting (Nil) (M) (L) (Z)
3-wire (NPN) M9N —
5 V, 12 V IC circuit
3-wire (PNP) 24 V — M9P —
Grommet
12 V M9B —
— 2-wire
— — 100 V, 200 V J51 — —
Solid state switch

Terminal 3-wire (NPN) 5 V, 12 V — G39


conduit 2-wire 12 V — K39
Yes

3-wire (NPN) M9NW —


Diagnostic indication 5 V, 12 V IC circuit Relay,
3-wire (PNP) M9PW —
(2-color indication) PLC
2-wire 12 V M9BW — —
24 V —
3-wire (NPN) M9NA —
Water resistant Grommet 5 V, 12 V IC circuit
3-wire (PNP) M9PA —
(2-color indication)
2-wire 12 V M9BA — —
With diagnostic output (2-color indication) 4-wire (NPN) 5 V, 12 V F59F — IC circuit
Magnetic field resistant (2-color indication) 2-wire (Non-polar) — P4DW — —
3-wire
— 5V — A96 — IC circuit —
Yes

(NPN equivalent)
100 V A93 — —
Grommet
Reed switch

100 V or less A90 — IC circuit


No Yes No

— 100 V, 200 V A54 — Relay,


12 V 200 V or less A64 — PLC
2-wire 24 V
Terminal — — A33 —
conduit — A34 PLC
Yes

100 V, 200V
DIN terminal — A44 Relay,
Diagnostic indication (2-color indication) Grommet — — A59W — PLC
∗ Lead wire length symbols: 0.5 m ·········· Nil (Example) M9NW ∗ Solid state auto switches marked with “ ” are produced upon receipt of order.
1 m ·········· M (Example) M9NWM
3 m ·········· L (Example) M9NWL
5 m ·········· Z (Example) M9NWZ
∗ Since there are other applicable auto switches than listed, refer to page 717 for details.
∗ For details about auto switches with pre-wired connector, refer to pages 1784 and 1785.
∗ D-A9/M9//M9W/M9AL auto switches are shipped together (not assembled). (Only auto switch brackets are assembled at the time of shipment.)
696
P0669-P0756-E.qxd 08.11.17 3:01 PM Page 697

Cylinder with Lock


Double Acting, Single Rod Series MNB
Cylinder Specifications

Bore size (mm) 32 40 50 63 80 100


Lubrication Not required (Non-lube)
Fluid Air
Proof pressure 1.5 MPa
Max. operating pressure 1.0 MPa
Min. operating pressure 0.08 MPa CLJ2
Piston speed 50 to 1000 mm/s *
Ambient and Without auto switch: –10 to 70°C (No freezing)
CLM2
fluid temperature With auto switch: –10 to 60°C (No freezing)
JIS Symbol CLG1
Cylinder with brake Cushion Air cushion on both ends
Stroke length tolerance Up to 250: +1.0 +1.4
0 , 251 to 1000: 0 CL1
Basic style, Axial foot style, Rod side flange style,
Mounting
Head side flange style, Single clevis style, Double clevis style
MLGC
∗ Load limits exist depending upon piston speed when locked, mounting direction and operating pressure. CNG

Made to Order Specifications Lock Specifications MNB


(For details, refer to pages 1836 and 1926.)
CNA
Symbol Specifications Bore size (mm) 32 40 50 63 80 100
-XA Change of rod end shape
Locking action Spring locking (Exhaust locking) CNS
-XC35 With coil scraper
Unlocking pressure 0.25 MPa or more
CLS
Lock starting pressure 0.20 MPa or less
Refer to pages 714 to 717 for cylinders with
auto switches. Max. operating pressure 1.0 MPa CLQ
• Minimum auto switch mounting stroke Locking direction Both directions
• Proper auto switch mounting position 552 882 1370 2160 3430 5390
RLQ
Holding force N
(detection at stroke end) and mounting
∗ Be sure to select cylinders in accordance with the procedures on page 694.
height MLU
• Operating range
• Switch mounting bracket: Part no. For cases with auto switches, refer to the table of minimum strokes for
Standard Stroke /mounting of auto switches (page 716). MLGP
ML1C
Maximum manufacturable
Bore size
Standard stroke (mm) (1) stroke
(mm) (mm)

25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 250, ø32 : 700
32, 40
300, 350, 400, 450, 500 ø40 : 800
25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 250,
50, 63 1000
300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600
25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 250,
80, 100 1000
300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600, 700, 800
Note 1) Intermediate strokes other than the above are produced upon receipt of order. Spacers are not used for
intermediate strokes.
Note 2) When exceeding the stroke range for each bracket, determine the maximum strokes referring to the
Selection Table (front matter 29 in Best Pneumatics No. 2).

Stopping Accuracy
(mm)
Piston speed (mm/s)
Lock type
100 300 500 1000
Spring locking ±0.3 ±0.6 ±1.0 ±2.0
D-
Condition: Lateral, Supply pressure P = 0.5 MPa
Load mass ······ Upper limit of allowed value
Solenoid valve for locking mounted on the unlocking port -X
Maximum value of stopping position dispersion from 100 measurements
Individual
-X

697
P0669-P0756-E.qxd 08.11.17 3:01 PM Page 698

Series MNB
Mounting Bracket Part No.

Bore size (mm) 32 40 50 63 80 100


Foot (1) MB-L03 MB-L04 MB-L05 MNB-L06∗ MB-L08 MB-L10
Flange MNB-F03∗ MNB-F04∗ MNB-F05∗ MNB-F06∗ MB-F08 MB-F10
Single clevis MB-C03 MB-C04 MB-C05 MB-C06 MB-C08 MB-C10
Double clevis MB-D03 MB-D04 MB-D05 MB-D06 MB-D08 MB-D10
Note 1) When ordering foot bracket, order 2 pieces per cylinder.
Note 2) Accessories for each mounting bracket are as follows.
Foot, Flange, Single clevis: Body mounting bolts
Double clevis: Clevis pin, Cotter pin, Flat washer, Body mounting bolts
Note 3) All are common to the MB series air cylinders, except the sections marked with a “∗”.

Rod Boot Material

Symbol Rod boot material Max. ambient temperature


J Nylon tarpaulin 20°C
K Heat resistant tarpaulin 110°C ∗
∗ Maximum ambient temperature for the rod boot itself.

Accessory

Rod side Head side Single Double


Mounting Basic style Foot style
flange style flange style clevis style clevis style

Standard Rod end nut


equipment Clevis pin
Single knuckle joint
Option Double knuckle joint (With pin)
With rod boot

Single Rod Mass/Aluminum Tube


(kg)
Bore size (mm) 32 40 50 63 80 100
Basic style 1.20 1.72 2.76 4.06 6.85 10.26
Foot style 1.30 1.84 2.94 4.32 7.28 10.85
Basic mass Flange style 1.44 2.04 3.29 4.80 8.30 13.57
Single clevis style 1.45 1.98 3.10 4.69 7.96 13.43
Double clevis style 1.46 1.99 3.19 4.85 8.25 13.95
Additional mass per each 50 mm of stroke All mounting brackets 0.11 0.16 0.26 0.27 0.42 0.56
Single knuckle 0.15 0.23 0.26 0.26 0.60 0.83
Accessory
Double knuckle (with pin) 0.22 0.37 0.43 0.43 0.87 1.27

Calculation:
(Example) MNBB32-100-D (Basic type, ø32, 100 st)
• Basic mass·············1.20 (Basic style, ø32)
• Additional mass ······ 0.11/50 stroke
• Cylinder stroke ······ 100 stroke
1.20 + 0.11 x 100/50 = 1.42 kg

698
P0669-P0756-E.qxd 08.11.17 3:01 PM Page 699

Cylinder with Lock


Double Acting, Single Rod Series MNB
Construction Principle



 
  
     
     
    CLJ2
Air pressure exhaust Air pressure supply
CLM2
CLG1
CL1
MLGC
CNG
 
  
  
 MNB
CNA
Locked state Unlocked state CNS
CLS
Spring locking (Exhaust locking)
      
 

             
     
  
  
       
CLQ

      

           
 
  

   


   
               

   
    
 
    
     

 
RLQ
   
 
   
  
   
          

      

    
 
  
MLU
MLGP
ML1C

D-
-X
Individual
-X

!!
P0669-P0756-E.qxd 08.11.17 3:01 PM Page 700

Series MNB
Construction

A section
B section

ø100 ø80 ø63 ø50 ø40 ø32

ø80, ø100

Component Parts Component Parts


No. Description Material Note No. Description Material Note
Rod cover Aluminum alloy Hard anodized and metallic painted Cushion valve Steel wire Nickel plated
Head cover Aluminum die-casted Chromated and metallic painted Wear ring Resin
Cover Aluminum alloy Hard anodized and metallic painted Unit holding tie-rod Carbon steel Chromated ø80, ø100 only
Cylinder tube Aluminum alloy Hard anodized BC element
Piston rod Carbon steel Hard chrome plated Tie-rod nut Carbon steel Nickel plated
Piston Aluminum alloy Chromated Rod end nut Carbon steel Nickel plated
Taper ring Carbon steel Heat treated Hexagon socket head cap screw Chromium molybdenum steel Nickel plated ø32 to ø63
Ball retainer Special resin Spring washer for hex. socket head cap screw Steel wire Nickel plated ø32 to ø63
Piston guide Carbon steel Zinc chromated Retaining ring Spring steel
Brake shoe holder Special steel Heat treated Piston seal NBR
Release ø32, ø80, ø100 Chromated Cylinder tube gasket NBR
Aluminum alloy
piston ø40, ø50, ø63 Hard anodized Rod seal A NBR
Release piston bushing Steel + Special resin ø32, ø80, ø100 only Cushion seal NBR
Unlocking cam Chromium molybdenum steel Glossy chromated Cushion valve seal NBR
Washer Carbon steel Colorless zinc chromated Piston gasket NBR
Retainer pre- ø32 Steel wire Zinc chromated Release piston seal NBR
load spring ø40 to ø100 Stainless steel wire Rod seal B NBR
Brake spring Steel wire Release piston gasket NBR
Clip A Stainless steel Zinc chromated Piston guide gasket NBR
Clip B Stainless steel Unlocking cam gasket NBR
Steel ball A Carbon steel
Steel ball B Carbon steel Replacement Parts: Seal Kit
Tooth ring Stainless steel Bore size (mm) Kit no. Contents
Bumper Polyurethane rubber
32 MB32-PS
Type C retaining ring for unlocking cam shaft Carbon steel
40 MB40-PS
Type C retaining ring for taper ring Carbon steel
50 MB50-PS
Brake shoe Babbitt
63 MB63-PS
Tie-rod Carbon steel Zinc chromated 80 MB80-PS
Bushing Copper alloy
100 MB100-PS
Cushion ring Brass
∗ Since the lock section for Series MNB is normally replaced as a unit, kits are
for the cylinder section only. These can be ordered using the order number for
each bore size.
∗ Seal kit includes a grease pack (ø32 to ø50: 10 g, ø63 and ø80: 20 g, ø100: 30
g). Order with the following part number when only the grease pack is needed.
Grease pack part number: GR-S-010 (10 g), GR-S-020 (20 g)

700
P0669-P0756-E.qxd 08.11.17 3:01 PM Page 701

Cylinder with Lock


Double Acting, Single Rod Series MNB
Dimensions
Basic style (B): MNBB P (Rc, NPT, G)
BP (Rc, NPT, G) Cushion valve Head side cylinder port
Unlocking port GA Rc 1/8 GB B
Unlocked when pressurized GD GC B2
BC element
Width across flats C
P (Rc, NPT, G)
Width across flats B1 Rod side cylinder port
MM
CLJ2

GR

GR
CLM2
C

øD
øE

B2
C

B
GL

GL1

W
CLG1

T
16

4xJ
4xJ
MB CL1
H1 VA 16
Effective thread length F GE GF V
A K BN N Q MLGC
H S + Stroke
ZZ + Stroke CNG
MNB
CNA
øe

CNS
CLS
10.2
10.2 l f CLQ
h
ZZ + Stroke
RLQ
With rod boot
(mm)
Bore size (mm) Stroke range (mm) Effective thread Width
length (mm) across flats A B B1 H1 B2 BN BP C D Ee11 F GA GB GC GD GL GL1
MLU
32 Up to 500 19.5 10 22 54 17 6 46 97 1/8 32.5 12 30 13 83 13 45.5 13 8.5 12
40 Up to 500 27 14 30 63 22 8 52 104 1/8 38 16 35 13 91 14 52.5 16.5 10 12
MLGP
50 Up to 600 32 18 35 75 27 11 65 120.5 1/4 46.5 20 40 14 104.5 15.5 58.5 19 12.5 15
63 Up to 600 32 18 35 90 27 11 75 134.5 1/4 56.5 20 45 14 119.5 16.5 68 23 17.5 12
ML1C
80 Up to 800 37 22 40 102 32 13 95 169 1/4 72 25 45 20 150 19 81 33 22 18
100 Up to 800 37 26 40 116 41 16 114 189 1/4 89 30 55 20 170 19 96 37.5 25 20

Bore size (mm) GR GE GF J MB K MM N P Q H S T V VA W ZZ


32 4 88.5 18.3 M6 x 1.0 4 6 M10 x 1.25 27 1/8 37 47 154 34 6.5 13 6.5 205
40 4 96.5 19.5 M6 x 1.0 4 6 M14 x 1.5 27 1/4 41.5 51 161 39.5 8 16.5 9 216
50 5 111.2 22.4 M8 x 1.25 5 7 M18 x 1.5 31.5 1/4 47.5 58 183 47 9 20 10.5 245
63 9 123.5 20.7 M8 x 1.25 5 7 M18 x 1.5 31.5 3/8 55 58 197 55.5 8.5 23 12 259
80 11.5 157 26 M10 x 1.5 5 10 M22 x 1.5 38 3/8 61 72 245 61.5 10.5 33 14 321
100 17 177 26 M10 x 1.5 5 10 M26 x 1.5 38 1/2 68 72 265 69.5 10.5 37.5 15 341

With Rod Boot (mm)


Bore size l h
e f
(mm) 1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 300 301 to 400 401 to 500 501 to 600 601 to 700 701 to 800 1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 300 301 to 400 401 to 500 501 to 600 601 to 700 701 to 800
32 36 23 12.5 25 37.5 50 75 100 125 — — — 73 86 98 111 136 161 186 — — —
40 41 23 12.5 25 37.5 50 75 100 125 — — — 81 94 106 119 144 169 194 — — —
50 51 25 12.5 25 37.5 50 75 100 125 150 — — 89 102 114 127 152 177 202 227 — —
63 51 25 12.5 25 37.5 50 75 100 125 150 — — 89 102 114 127 152 177 202 227 — —
80 56 29 12.5 25 37.5 50 75 100 125 150 175 200 101 114 126 139 164 189 214 239 264 289
100 61 29 12.5 25 37.5 50 75 100 125 150 175 200 101 114 126 139 164 189 214 239 264 289

Bore size ZZ D-


(mm) 1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 300 301 to 400 401 to 500 501 to 600 601 to 700 701 to 800
32 231 244 256 269 294 319 344 — — — -X
40 246 259 271 284 309 334 359 — — —
50 276 289 301 314 339 364 389 414 — — Individual
63 290 303 315 328 353 378 403 428 — — -X
80 350 363 375 388 413 438 463 488 513 538
100 370 383 395 408 433 458 483 508 533 538
701
P0669-P0756-E.qxd 08.11.17 3:01 PM Page 702

Series MNB
Dimensions
Axial foot style (L): MNBL

Rc 1/8
BC element
GA
GD GC P (Rc, NPT, G)
BP (Rc, NPT, G) Unlocking port
Rod side cylinder port
Unlocked when pressurized

W GR
GL

GL1

GE
B
B2
Width H S + Stroke
across flats B1 K F C
A BN GF
Cushion valve P (Rc, NPT, G) 2 x J (Both sides)
MM
Effective thread length
GB
H1 Head side cylinder port

Q
øE
øD

LY
C
4 x øLD

LH
Width across flats
Y X VA N X Y T
LT

LS + Stroke LX
ZZ + Stroke LZ

(mm)
Bore size Stroke range Effective thread Width
across A B B1 H1 B2 BN BP C D Ee11 F GA GB GC GD GL GL1 GR GE GF
(mm) (mm) length (mm) flats

32 Up to 700 19.5 10 22 54 17 6 46 97 1/8 32.5 12 30 13 83 13 45.5 13 8.5 12 4 88.5 18.3


40 Up to 800 27 14 30 63 22 8 52 104 1/8 38 16 35 13 91 14 52.5 16.5 10 12 4 96.5 19.5
50 Up to 1000 32 18 35 75 27 11 65 120.5 1/4 46.5 20 40 14 104.5 15.5 58.5 19 12.5 15 5 111.2 22.4
63 Up to 1000 32 18 35 90 27 11 75 134.5 1/4 56.5 20 45 14 119.5 16.5 68 23 17.5 12 9 123.5 20.7
80 Up to 1000 37 22 40 102 32 13 95 169 1/4 72 25 45 20 150 19 81 33 22 18 11.5 157 26
100 Up to 1000 37 26 40 116 41 16 114 189 1/4 89 30 55 20 170 19 96 37.5 25 20 17 177 26

Bore size J LD LH LS LT LX LY LZ K MM N P Q H S T V VA W X Y ZZ
(mm)
32 M6 x 1.0 7 30 198 3.2 32 57 50 6 M10 x 1.25 27 1/8 37 47 154 34 6.5 13 6.5 22 9 232
40 M6 x 1.0 9 33 209 3.2 38 64.5 55 6 M14 x 1.5 27 1/4 41.5 51 161 39.5 8 16.5 9 24 11 247
50 M8 x 1.25 9 40 237 3.2 46 77.5 70 7 M18 x 1.5 31.5 1/4 47.5 58 183 47 9 20 10.5 27 11 279
63 M8 x 1.25 12 48 251 3.6 56 93 80 7 M18 x 1.5 31.5 3/8 55 58 197 55.5 8.5 23 12 27 14 296
80 M10 x 1.5 12 55 305 4.5 72 106 100 10 M22 x 1.5 38 3/8 61 72 245 61.5 10.5 33 14 30 14 361
100 M10 x 1.5 14 65 329 4.5 89 123 120 10 M26 x 1.5 38 1/2 68 72 265 69.5 10.5 37.5 15 32 16 385
∗ Refer to page 701 for cylinders with a rod boot.

702
P0669-P0756-E.qxd 08.11.17 3:01 PM Page 703

Cylinder with Lock


Double Acting, Single Rod Series MNB

Rod side flange style (F): MNBF

Rc 1/8
BC element
BP (Rc, NPT, G)
Unlocking port GA CLJ2
GD GC P (Rc, NPT, G)
Unlocked when pressurized
Rod side cylinder port CLM2

W GR
CLG1
GL

CL1
GL1

MLGC
GE
4 x øFD
B CNG
B2
H S + Stroke C MNB
Width across A K F BN GF
Cushion valve 4xJ
flats B1 Effective thread length
GB P (Rc, NPT, G) CNA
H1 Head side
MM

Q
cylinder port
CNS
øFd
øD

FB
FY
B2
B
C
CLS
Width across
flats FE FT VA N T
CLQ
ZZ + Stroke
FX RLQ
FZ

MLU
MLGP
(mm) ML1C
Bore size Stroke range Effective thread Width
across A FB B B1 H1 B2 BN BP C D F Fd FD FE FT FX FY FZ GA GB
(mm) (mm) length (mm) flats

32 Up to 700 19.5 10 22 56 54 17 6 46 97 1/8 32.5 12 13 25 7 3 10 72 38 87 83 13


40 Up to 800 27 14 30 65 63 22 8 52 104 1/8 38 16 13 31 9 3 10 83 46 101 91 14
50 Up to 1000 32 18 35 77 75 27 11 65 120.5 1/4 46.5 20 14 38.5 9 2 12 100 52 120 104.5 15.5
63 Up to 1000 32 18 35 92 90 27 11 75 134.5 1/4 56.5 20 14 39.5 9 2 12 115 62 135 119.5 16.5
80 Up to 1000 37 22 40 100 102 32 13 95 169 1/4 72 25 20 45.5 12 4 16 126 63 153 150 19
100 Up to 1000 37 26 40 120 116 41 16 114 189 1/4 89 30 20 54 14 4 16 150 75 178 170 19

Bore size GC GD GL GL1 GR GE GF J K MM N P Q H S T V VA W ZZ


(mm)
32 45.5 13 8.5 12 4 88.5 18.3 M6 x 1.0 6 M10 x 1.25 27 1/8 37 47 154 34 6.5 13 6.5 205
40 52.5 16.5 10 12 4 96.5 19.5 M6 x 1.0 6 M14 x 1.5 27 1/4 41.5 51 161 39.5 8 16.5 9 216
50 58.5 19 12.5 15 5 111.2 22.4 M8 x 1.25 7 M18 x 1.5 31.5 1/4 47.5 58 183 47 9 20 10.5 245
63 68 23 17.5 12 9 123.5 20.7 M8 x 1.25 7 M18 x 1.5 31.5 3/8 55 58 197 55.5 8.5 23 12 259
80 81 33 22 18 11.5 157 26 M10 x 1.5 10 M22 x 1.5 38 3/8 61 72 245 61.5 10.5 33 14 321
100 96 37.5 25 20 17 177 26 M10 x 1.5 10 M26 x 1.5 38 1/2 68 72 265 69.5 10.5 37.5 15 341
∗ Refer to page 701 for cylinders with a rod boot.

D-
-X
Individual
-X

703
P0669-P0756-E.qxd 08.11.17 3:01 PM Page 704

Series MNB
Dimensions
Head side flange style (G): MNBG

Rc 1/8
BC element
GA
P (Rc, NPT, G)
BP (Rc, NPT, G) unlocking port GD GC
Rod side cylinder port
Unlocked when pressurized

W GR
GL

GL1
T

VA
GE
P (Rc, NPT, G)
Head side cylinder port
H S + Stroke
4 x øFD C
Width A K F BN GF
across flats B1 Effective thread length Cushion valve 4xJ
GB
MM H1

Q
V
øD
øE

B

FB
FY
C
Width across flats N FT FX
ZZ + Stroke FZ

(mm)
Bore size Stroke range Effective thread Width
across A FB B B1 H1 BN BP C D Ee11 F FD FT FX FY FZ GA GB GC GD
(mm) (mm) length (mm) flats
32 Up to 500 19.5 10 22 56 54 17 6 97 1/8 32.5 12 30 13 7 10 72 38 87 83 13 45.5 13
40 Up to 500 27 14 30 65 63 22 8 104 1/8 38 16 35 13 9 10 83 46 101 91 14 52.5 16.5
50 Up to 600 32 18 35 77 75 27 11 120.5 1/4 46.5 20 40 14 9 12 100 52 120 104.5 15.5 58.5 19
63 Up to 600 32 18 35 92 90 27 11 134.5 1/4 56.5 20 45 14 9 12 115 62 135 119.5 16.5 68 23
80 Up to 800 37 22 40 100 102 32 13 169 1/4 72 25 45 20 12 16 126 63 153 150 19 81 33
100 Up to 800 37 26 40 120 116 41 16 189 1/4 89 30 55 20 14 16 150 75 178 170 19 96 37.5

Bore size T
GL GL1 GR GE GF J K MM N P Q H S V VA W ZZ
(mm)
32 8.5 12 4 88.5 18.3 M6 x 1.0 6 M10 x 1.25 27 1/8 37 47 154 34 6.5 13 6.5 211
40 10 12 4 96.5 19.5 M6 x 1.0 6 M14 x 1.5 27 1/4 41.5 51 161 39.5 8 16.5 9 222
50 12.5 15 5 111.2 22.4 M8 x 1.25 7 M18 x 1.5 31.5 1/4 47.5 58 183 47 9 20 10.5 253
63 17.5 12 9 123.5 20.7 M8 x 1.25 7 M18 x 1.5 31.5 3/8 55 58 197 55.5 8.5 23 12 267
80 22 18 11.5 157 26 M10 x 1.5 10 M22 x 1.5 38 3/8 61 72 245 61.5 10.5 33 14 333
100 25 20 17 177 26 M10 x 1.5 10 M26 x 1.5 38 1/2 68 72 265 69.5 10.5 37.5 15 353
∗ Refer to page 701 for cylinders with a rod boot.

704
P0669-P0756-E.qxd 08.11.17 3:01 PM Page 705

Cylinder with Lock


Double Acting, Single Rod Series MNB

Single clevis style (C): MNBC

Rc 1/8
GA BC element
GD GC P (Rc, NPT, G)
BP (Rc, NPT, G) Unlocking port
Rod side cylinder port
Unlocked when pressurized
CLJ2

W GR
CLM2
GL

CLG1
GL1

VA CL1
GE
P (Rc, NPT, G) B MLGC
Head side cylinder port B2
H S + Stroke
A K F BN GF
C CNG
Width Effective thread length Cushion valve
across flats B1 GB 4xJ
H1
MNB
MM

Q
H10
øCD
CNA
øD
øE

B2
C

B
CNS
U
Width across flats
N L CX
CLS
Z + Stroke RR T
ZZ + Stroke CLQ
RLQ

(mm)
MLU
Bore size Stroke range Effective thread Width
(mm) (mm) length (mm)
across
flats
A B B1 H1 B2 BN BP C CDH10 CX -0.1
-0.3 D Ee11 F GA GB GC GD GL GL1 GR MLGP
32 Up to 500 19.5 10 22 54 17 6 46 97 1/8 32.5 10 14 12 30 13 83 13 45.5 13 8.5 12 4
40 Up to 500 27 14 30 63 22 8 52 104 1/8 38 10 14 16 35 13 91 14 52.5 16.5 10 12 4
ML1C
50 Up to 600 32 18 35 75 27 11 65 120.5 1/4 46.5 14 20 20 40 14 104.5 15.5 58.5 19 12.5 15 5
63 Up to 600 32 18 35 90 27 11 75 134.5 1/4 56.5 14 20 20 45 14 119.5 16.5 68 23 17.5 12 9
80 Up to 800 37 22 40 102 32 13 95 169 1/4 72 22 30 25 45 20 150 19 81 33 22 18 11.5
100 Up to 800 37 26 40 116 41 16 114 189 1/4 89 22 30 30 55 20 170 19 96 37.5 25 20 17

Bore size T
GE GF J K L MM N P Q RR H S U V VA W Z ZZ
(mm)
32 88.5 18.3 M6 x 1.0 6 23 M10 x 1.25 27 1/8 37 10.5 47 154 34 13 6.5 13 6.5 224 234.5
40 96.5 19.5 M6 x 1.0 6 23 M14 x 1.5 27 1/4 41.5 11 51 161 39.5 13 8 16.5 9 235 246
50 111.2 22.4 M8 x 1.25 7 30 M18 x 1.5 31.5 1/4 47.5 15 58 183 47 17 9 20 10.5 271 286
63 123.5 20.7 M8 x 1.25 7 30 M18 x 1.5 31.5 3/8 55 15 58 197 55.5 17 8.5 23 12 285 300
80 157 26 M10 x 1.5 10 42 M22 x 1.5 38 3/8 61 23 72 245 61.5 26 10.5 33 14 359 382
100 177 26 M10 x 1.5 10 42 M26 x 1.5 38 1/2 68 23 72 265 69.5 26 10.5 37.5 15 379 402
∗ Refer to page 701 for cylinders with a rod boot.

D-
-X
Individual
-X

705
P0669-P0756-E.qxd 08.11.17 3:01 PM Page 706

Series MNB
Dimensions
Double clevis style (D): MNBD Rc 1/8
GA BC element
GD GC P (Rc, NPT, G)
BP (Rc, NPT, G) Unlocking port
Unlocked when pressurized Rod side cylinder port

GR
W
GL1
GL

P (Rc, NPT, G) B
VA
GE Head side cylinder port
B2
H S + Stroke C
Width across A K F BN GF
Cushion valve 4xJ
flats B1 Effective thread length
GB
MM H1

Q
øCDH10
øD

V
øE

B2
C

B
Width across flats
U

Z + Stroke N L RR CX
ZZ + Stroke CZ
T
(mm)
Bore size Stroke range Effective thread Width +0.3
H10 GL1
across A B B1 H1 B2 BN BP C CD CX +0.1 CZ D Ee11 F GA GB GC GD GL
(mm) (mm) length (mm) flats

32 Up to 500 19.5 10 22 54 17 6 46 97 1/8 32.5 10 14 28 12 30 13 83 13 45.5 13 8.5 12


40 Up to 500 27 14 30 63 22 8 52 104 1/8 38 10 14 28 16 35 13 91 14 52.5 16.5 10 12
50 Up to 600 32 18 35 75 27 11 65 120.5 1/4 46.5 14 20 40 20 40 14 104.5 15.5 58.5 19 12.5 15
63 Up to 600 32 18 35 90 27 11 75 134.5 1/4 56.5 14 20 40 20 45 14 119.5 16.5 68 23 17.5 12
80 Up to 800 37 22 40 102 32 13 95 169 1/4 72 22 30 60 25 45 20 150 19 81 33 22 18
100 Up to 800 37 26 40 116 41 16 114 189 1/4 89 22 30 60 30 55 20 170 19 96 37.5 25 20

Bore size
GR GE GF J K L MM N P Q RR H S T U V VA W Z ZZ
(mm)
32 4 88.5 18.3 M6 x 1.0 6 23 M10 x 1.25 27 1/8 37 10.5 47 154 34 13 6.5 13 6.5 224 234.5
40 4 96.5 19.5 M6 x 1.0 6 23 M14 x 1.5 27 1/4 41.5 11 51 161 39.5 13 8 16.5 9 235 246
50 5 111.2 22.4 M8 x 1.25 7 30 M18 x 1.5 31.5 1/4 47.5 15 58 183 47 17 9 20 10.5 271 286
63 9 123.5 20.7 M8 x 1.25 7 30 M18 x 1.5 31.5 3/8 55 15 58 197 55.5 17 8.5 23 12 285 300
80 11.5 157 26 M10 x 1.5 10 42 M22 x 1.5 38 3/8 61 23 72 245 61.5 26 10.5 33 14 359 382
100 17 177 26 M10 x 1.5 10 42 M26 x 1.5 38 1/2 68 23 72 265 69.5 26 10.5 37.5 15 379 402
∗ Refer to page 701 for cylinders with a rod boot.

Double Clevis Pivot Bracket

Z + Stroke DB B
øDD DX

4 x øDT 90°


DS
DH

4 x øDR

DU DL DU DO DC DO
DA DE

(mm) Rotating Angle


Bore size Bore size
Part no.
(mm)
B DA DB DL DU DC DX DE DO DR DT DS DH Z DDH10 (Hole) (mm) A° B° A° + B° + 90°
+0.058
32 54 42 32 22 10 44 14 62 9 6.6 15 7 33 224 10 0
MB-B03 +0.058 32, 40 25° 45° 160°
40 63 42 32 22 10 44 14 62 9 6.6 15 7 33 235 10 0
+0.070
50 75 53 43 30 11.5 60 20 81 10.5 9 18 8 45 271 14 0
MB-B05 +0.070 50, 63 40° 60° 190°
63 90 53 43 30 11.5 60 20 81 10.5 9 18 8 45 285 14 0
+0.084
80 102 73 64 45 14 86 30 111 12.5 11 22 10 65 359 22 0
MB-B08 +0.084 80, 100 30° 55° 175°
100 116 73 64 45 14 86 30 111 12.5 11 22 10 65 379 22 0

706
P0669-P0756-E.qxd 08.11.17 3:01 PM Page 707

Series MNB
Accessory Bracket Dimensions
Accessory Bracket Dimensions
Rod End Nut Knuckle Joint Pin,
30°
(Standard equipment) d Clevis Pin

øDd9
2 x ød

C
D

m l CLJ2
L
H B
CLM2
Bore size Bore size (mm) d Note)
Part no. B C D H d Part no. Dd9 L l m Cotter pin
(mm) Clevis Knuckle (Drill through)
CLG1
NT-03 32 17 19.6 16.5 6 M10 x 1.25 CD-M03 32, 40 10–0.040
–0.076 44 36 4 3 ø3 x 18 l
NT-04 40 22 25.4 21 8 M14 x 1.5 CD-M05 50, 63 14–0.050
–0.093 60 51 4.5 4 ø4 x 25 l CL1
NT-05 50, 63 27 31.2 26 11 M18 x 1.5 CD-M08 80, 100 22–0.065
–0.117 82 72 5 4 ø4 x 35 l
NT-08 80 32 37.0 31 13 M22 x 1.5 Note) Cotter pins and flat washers are included.
NT-10 100 41 47.3 39 16 M26 x 1.5 MLGC
CNG
I Type Single Knuckle Joint Y Type Double Knuckle Join

MM øNDH10 1
MNB
45° RR

R
CNA

R
MM øNDH10
øE1

1
A1 U1

øE1
CNS

NX
NZ
L1
A NX
U1
L1 CLS
Bore size Bore size
Part no. (mm) A A1 E1 L1 MM R1 U1 NDH10 NX Part no.
(mm)
E1 L1 MM R1 U1 NDH10 NX NZ CLQ
I-03M 32 40 14 20 30 M10 x 1.25 12 16 10 +0.058
0 14–0.10
–0.30 Y-03M 32 20 30 M10 x 1.25 10 16 10 +0.058
0 14 +0.30
+0.10 28–0.10
–0.30

I-04M 40 50 19 22 40 M14 x 1.5 12.5 19 10 +0.058


0 14–0.10
–0.30 Y-04M 40 22 40 M14 x 1.5 11 19 10 +0.058
0 14 +0.30
+0.10 28–0.10
–0.30
RLQ
I-05M 50, 63 64 24 28 50 M18 x 1.5 16.5 24 14 +0.070
0 20–0.10
–0.30 Y-05M 50, 63 28 50 M18 x 1.5 14 24 14 +0.070
0 20 +0.30
+0.10 40–0.10
–0.30

I-08M 80 80 26 40 60 M22 x 1.5 23.5 34 22 +0.084


0 30–0.10
–0.30 Y-08M 80 40 65 M22 x 1.5 20 34 22 +0.084
0 30 +0.30
+0.10 60–0.10
–0.30 MLU
I-10M 100 80 26 40 60 M26 x 1.5 23.5 34 22 +0.084
0 30–0.10
–0.30 Y-10M 100 40 65 M26 x 1.5 20 34 22 +0.084
0 30 +0.30
+0.10 60–0.10
–0.30

Note) Pin, cotter pin and plain washer are attached with double knuckle joint. MLGP
ML1C

D-
-X
Individual
-X

707
P0669-P0756-E.qxd 08.11.17 3:01 PM Page 708

Cylinder with Lock


Double Acting, Double Rod

Series MNBW
ø32, ø40, ø50, ø63, ø80, ø100

How to Order

MNBW L 50 100 D
With auto switch MDNBW L 50 100 D M9BW
With auto switch
(Built-in magnet)
Double rod type Locking
direction
Mounting style Number of auto switches
Both
B Basic style Bore size D directions
Nil 2 pcs.
L Axial foot style 32 32 mm S 1 pc.
F Rod side flange style 40 40 mm n “n” pcs.
50 50 mm
63 63 mm Auto switch
80 80 mm Nil Without auto switch
100 100 mm
∗ For the applicable auto switch
model, refer to the table below.
Built-in Magnet Cylinder Model Port thread type
If a built-in magnet cylinder without an auto Nil Rc With rod boot
switch is required, there is no need to enter TN NPT Nil None
the symbol for the auto switch.
(Example) MDNBWL40-100-D TF G Rod boot J Nylon tarpaulin
K Heat resistant tarpaulin
Cylinder stroke (mm) ∗ Rod boot comes with both sides. If only single-
Refer to page 709 for the standard stroke. sided is required, please consult with SMC.

Applicable Auto Switch/Refer to pages 1719 to 1827 for further information on auto switches.
Load voltage Auto switch model Lead wire length (m)
Indicator

Electrical Wiring Pre-wired Applicable


Type
light

Special function Tie-rod Band 0.5 1 3 5


entry (Output) DC AC connector load
mounting mounting (Nil) (M) (L) (Z)
3-wire (NPN) M9N —
5 V, 12 V IC circuit
3-wire (PNP) 24 V — M9P —
Grommet
12 V M9B —
— 2-wire
— — 100 V, 200 V J51 — —
Solid state switch

Terminal 3-wire (NPN) 5 V, 12 V — G39


conduit 2-wire 12 V — K39
Yes

3-wire (NPN) M9NW — Relay,


Diagnostic indication 5 V, 12 V IC circuit
3-wire (PNP) M9PW — PLC
(2-color indication)
2-wire 12 V M9BW — —
24 V —
Grommet
3-wire (NPN) M9NA —
Water resistant 5 V, 12 V IC circuit
3-wire (PNP) M9PA —
(2-color indication)
2-wire 12 V M9BA — —
With diagnostic output (2-color indication) 4-wire (NPN) 5 V, 12 V F59F — IC circuit
Magnetic field resistant (2-color indication) 2-wire (Non-polar) — P4DW — —
3-wire
— 5V — A96 — IC circuit —
Yes

(NPN equivalent)
100 V A93 — —
Grommet
Reed switch

100 V or less A90 — IC circuit


No Yes No

— 100 V, 200 V A54 — Relay,


12 V 200 V or less A64 — PLC
2-wire 24 V
Terminal — — A33 —
conduit — A34 PLC
Yes

100 V, 200 V
DIN terminal — A44 Relay,
Diagnostic indication (2-color indication) Grommet — — A59W — PLC
∗ Lead wire length symbols: 0.5 m··········Nil (Example) M9NW ∗ Solid state auto switches marked with “ ” are produced upon receipt of order.
1 m·········· M (Example) M9NWM
3 m·········· L (Example) M9NWL
5 m·········· Z (Example) M9NWZ
∗ Since there are other applicable auto switches than listed, refer to page 717 for details.
∗ For details about auto switches with pre-wired connector, refer to pages 1784 and 1785.
∗ D-A9/M9/M9W/M9AL auto switches are shipped together (not assembled). (Only auto switch brackets are assembled at the time of shipment.)
708
P0669-P0756-E.qxd 08.11.17 3:01 PM Page 709

Cylinder with Lock


Double Acting, Double Rod Series MNBW
Cylinder Specifications

Bore size (mm) 32 40 50 63 80 100


Lubrication Not required (Non-lube)
Fluid Air
Proof pressure 1.5 MPa
Max. operating pressure 1.0 MPa
Min. operating pressure 0.08 MPa CLJ2
Piston speed 50 to 1000 mm/s *
Ambient and Without auto switch: –10 to 70°C (No freezing)
CLM2
fluid temperature With auto switch: –10 to 60°C (No freezing)
CLG1
Cushion Air cushion on both ends
Stroke length tolerance Up to 250: +1.0 +1.4
0 , 251 to 1000: 0
CL1
JIS Symbol
Cylinder with brake Mounting Basic style, Axial foot style, Rod side flange style
∗ Load limits exist depending upon piston speed when locked, mounting direction and operating
MLGC
pressure.
CNG
Lock Specifications MNB

Bore size (mm) 32 40 50 63 80 100 CNA


Refer to pages 714 to 717 for cylinders with
Locking action Spring locking (Exhaust locking) CNS
auto switches.
• Minimum auto switch mounting stroke Unlocking pressure 0.25 MPa or more
• Proper auto switch mounting position Lock starting pressure 0.20 MPa or less CLS
(detection at stroke end) and mounting
height Max. operating pressure 1.0 MPa
• Operating range
CLQ
Locking direction Both directions
• Switch mounting bracket: Part no.
Holding force N 552 882 1370 2160 3430 5390 RLQ
∗ Be sure to select cylinders in accordance with the procedures on page 694.
MLU
For cases with auto switches, refer to the table of minimum strokes for
Standard Stroke /mounting of auto switches (page 716). MLGP
ML1C
Bore size
(mm) Standard stroke (mm)
32 25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500
40 25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500
50 25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600
63 25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600
80 25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600, 700, 800
100 25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600, 700, 800
∗ Intermediate strokes other than the above are produced upon receipt of order. Spacers are not used for
intermediate strokes.

Stopping Accuracy
(mm)
Piston speed (mm/s)
Lock type
100 300 500 1000
Spring locking ±0.3 ±0.6 ±1.0 ±2.0
Condition: Lateral, Supply pressure P = 0.5 MPa
Load mass ······ Upper limit of allowed value D-
Solenoid valve for locking mounted on the unlocking port
Maximum value of stopping position dispersion from 100 measurements
-X
Individual
-X

709
P0669-P0756-E.qxd 08.11.17 3:01 PM Page 710

Series MNBW
Mounting Bracket Part No.

Bore size (mm) 32 40 50 63 80 100


Foot (1) MB-L03 MB-L04 MB-L05 MNB-L∗ MB-L08 MB-L10
Flange MNB-F03∗ MNB-F04∗ MNB-F05∗ MNB-F06∗ MB-F08 MB-F10
Note 1) When ordering foot bracket, order 2 pieces per cylinder.
Note 2) Accessories for each mounting bracket are as follows.
Foot, Flange: Body mounting bolts
Note 3) All are common to the MB series air cylinders, except the sections marked with a ∗.

Rod Boot Material

Symbol Rod boot material Max. ambient temperature


J Nylon tarpaulin 70°C
K Heat resistant tarpaulin 110°C ∗
∗ Maximum ambient temperature for the rod boot itself.

Accessory

Rod side
Mounting Basic style Foot style flange style
Standard equipment Rod end nut
Option With rod boot

Double Rod Mass/Aluminum Tube


(kg)
Bore size (mm) 32 40 50 63 80 100
Basic style 1.26 1.82 2.91 4.24 7.23 10.70
Basic mass Foot style 1.36 1.94 3.09 4.50 7.66 11.29
Flange style 1.50 2.14 3.44 4.98 8.68 14.01
Additional mass per each 50 mm of stroke All mounting brackets 0.15 0.24 0.34 0.35 0.61 0.84
Single knuckle 0.15 0.23 0.26 0.26 0.60 0.83
Accessory
Double knuckle (With pin) 0.22 0.37 0.43 0.43 0.87 1.27
Calculation:
(Example) MNBWB32-100-D (Basic type, ø32, 100 st)
• Basic mass··············1.26 (Basic style, ø32)
• Additional mass ······0.11/50 stroke
• Cylinder stroke ········· 100 stroke
1.26 + 0.11 x 100/50 = 1.48 kg

710
P0669-P0756-E.qxd 08.11.17 3:01 PM Page 711

Cylinder with Lock


Double Acting, Double Rod Series MNBW
Construction

A
B

CLJ2
CLM2
CLG1
CL1

A section MLGC
B section
CNG
MNB
ø100 ø80 ø63 ø50 ø40 ø32 ø80, ø100
CNA
CNS
CLS
Component Parts Component Parts
No. Description Material Note No. Description Material Note CLQ
1 Rod cover A Aluminum alloy Hard anodized and metallic painted 29 Cushion valve Steel wire Nickel plated
2 Rod cover B Aluminum die-casted Chromated and metallic painted 30 Unit holding tie-rod Carbon steel Chromated ø80, ø100 only RLQ
3 Cover Aluminum alloy Hard anodized and metallic painted 31 BC element
4 Cylinder tube Aluminum alloy Hard anodized 32 Tie-rod nut Carbon steel Nickel plated MLU
5 Piston rod Carbon steel Hard chrome plated 33 Rod end nut Carbon steel Nickel plated
6 Piston Aluminum alloy Chromated 34 Hexagon socket head cap screw Chromium molybdenum steel Nickel plated ø32 to ø63 MLGP
7 Taper ring Carbon steel Heat treated 35 Spring washer for hex. socket head cap screw Steel wire Nickel plated ø32 to ø63
8 Ball retainer Special resin 36 Retaining ring Spring steel
ML1C
9 Piston guide Carbon steel Zinc chromated 37 Piston holder Urethane
10 Brake shoe holder Special steel Heat treated 38 Piston seal NBR
Release ø32, ø80, ø100 Chromated 39 Cylinder tube gasket NBR
11 Aluminum alloy
piston ø40, ø50, ø63 Hard anodized 40 Rod seal A NBR
12 Release piston bushing Steel + Special resin ø32, ø80, ø100 only 41 Cushion seal NBR
13 Unlocking cam Chromium molybdenum steel Glossy chromated 42 Cushion valve seal NBR
14 Washer Carbon steel Colorless zinc chromated 43 Piston gasket NBR
Retainer pre- ø32 Steel wire Zinc chromated 44 Release piston seal NBR
15
load spring ø40 to ø100 Stainless steel wire 45 Rod seal B NBR
16 Brake spring Steel wire 46 Release piston gasket NBR
17 Clip A Stainless steel Zinc chromated 47 Piston guide gasket NBR
18 Clip B Stainless steel 48 Unlocking cam gasket NBR
19 Steel ball A Carbon steel
20 Steel ball B Carbon steel Replacement Parts: Seal Kit
21 Tooth ring Stainless steel Bore size (mm) Kit no. Contents
22 Bumper Polyurethane rubber
32 MBW32-PS
23 Type C retaining ring for unlocking cam shaft Carbon steel
40 MBW40-PS
24 Type C retaining ring for taper ring Carbon steel
50 MBW50-PS
25 Brake shoe Babbitt
63 MBW63-PS
26 Tie-rod Carbon steel Zinc chromated 80 MBW80-PS D-
27 Bushing Copper alloy
100 MBW100-PS
28 Cushion ring Brass
∗ As a general rule, the lock section of Series MNBW is replaced as a -X
unit, and therefore, the replacement seal kits are for the cylinder section
only. These can be ordered using the order number for each bore size. Individual
∗ Seal kit includes a grease pack (ø32 to ø50: 10 g, ø63 and ø80: 20 g, ø100: 30 -X
g). Order with the following part number when only the grease pack is needed.
Grease pack part number: GR-S-010 (10 g), GR-S-020 (20 g)

711
P0669-P0756-E.qxd 08.11.17 3:01 PM Page 712

Series MNBW
Dimensions
Basic style (B): MNBWB

BP (Rc, NPT, G) Unlocking port Rc 1/8


BC element
Unlocked when pressurized GA B
GB B2
Width across flats GD GC Cushion valve

Width across flats B1 C


P (Rc, NPT, G) P (Rc, NPT, G)
MM Cylinder port MM
Cylinder port

W GR
øD

øD
øE
C

øE

B2
B
C
GL

GL1

T
16 4xJ
MB
4xJ V
H1 VA 16
Effective Effective Q
thread length GE GF thread length

A K F BN N F K A
H S + Stroke H + Stroke
ZZ + 2 strokes
øe

øe
10.2 13

10.2 l f f l + Stroke 9

h h + Stroke
ZZ + 2 strokes

With rod boot

(mm)
Bore size Stroke range Effective thread length Width
(mm) across flats A B B1 H1 B2 BN BP C D Ee11 F GA GB GC GD GL GL1
(mm) (mm)
32 Up to 500 19.5 10 22 54 17 6 46 97 1/8 32.5 12 30 13 83 13 45.5 13 8.5 12
40 Up to 500 27 14 30 63 22 8 52 104 1/8 38 16 35 13 91 14 52.5 16.5 10 12
50 Up to 600 32 18 35 75 27 11 65 120.5 1/4 46.5 20 40 14 104.5 15.5 58.5 19 12.5 15
63 Up to 600 32 18 35 90 27 11 75 134.5 1/4 56.5 20 45 14 119.5 16.5 68 23 17.5 12
80 Up to 800 37 22 40 102 32 13 95 169 1/4 72 25 45 20 150 19 81 33 22 18
100 Up to 800 37 26 40 116 41 16 114 189 1/4 89 30 55 20 170 19 96 37.5 25 20

Bore size
(mm)
GR GE GF J MB K MM N P Q H S T V VA W ZZ
32 4 88.5 18.3 M6 x 1.0 4 6 M10 x 1.25 27 1/8 37 47 154 34 6.5 13 6.5 248
40 4 96.5 19.5 M6 x 1.0 4 6 M14 x 1.5 27 1/4 41.5 51 161 39.5 8 16.5 9 263
50 5 111.2 22.4 M8 x 1.25 5 7 M18 x 1.5 31.5 1/4 47.5 58 183 47 9 20 10.5 299
63 9 123.5 20.7 M8 x 1.25 5 7 M18 x 1.5 31.5 3/8 55 58 197 55.5 8.5 23 12 313
80 11.5 157 26 M10 x 1.5 5 10 M22 x 1.5 38 3/8 61 72 245 61.5 10.5 33 14 389
100 17 177 26 M10 x 1.5 5 10 M26 x 1.5 38 1/2 68 72 265 69.5 10.5 37.5 15 409

With Rod Boot Note) ZZ: Dimensions for cylinders with a rod boot on both sides.
Bore l h ZZ Note)
size e f 1 to 51 to 101 to 151 to 201 to 301 to 401 to 501 to 601 to 701 to 1 to 51 to 101 to 151 to 201 to 301 to 401 to 501 to 601 to 701 to 1 to 51 to 101 to 151 to 201 to 301 to 401 to 501 to 601 to 701 to
(mm) 50 100 150 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 50 100 150 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 50 100 150 200 300 400 500 600 700 800
32 36 23 12.5 25 37.5 50 75 100 125 — — — 73 86 98 111 136 161 186 — — — 300 326 350 376 426 476 526 — — —
40 41 23 12.5 25 37.5 50 75 100 125 — — — 81 94 106 119 144 169 194 — — — 323 349 373 399 449 499 549 — — —
50 51 25 12.5 25 37.5 50 75 100 125 150 — — 89 102 114 127 152 177 202 227 — — 361 387 411 437 487 537 587 637 — —
63 51 25 12.5 25 37.5 50 75 100 125 150 — — 89 102 114 127 152 177 202 227 — — 375 401 425 451 501 551 601 651 — —
80 56 29 12.5 25 37.5 50 75 100 125 150 175 200 101 114 126 139 164 189 214 239 264 289 447 473 497 523 573 623 673 723 773 823
100 61 29 12.5 25 37.5 50 75 100 125 150 175 200 101 114 126 139 164 189 214 239 264 289 467 493 517 543 593 643 693 743 793 843

712
P0669-P0756-E.qxd 08.11.17 3:01 PM Page 713

Cylinder with Lock


Double Acting, Double Rod Series MNBW
Dimensions
Axial foot style (L): GA
Rc 1/8
BC element
MNBWL BP (Rc, NPT, G) Unlocking port GD GC P (Rc, NPT, G)
Unlocked when pressurized Cylinder port

W GR
GL

GL1
GE
P (Rc, NPT, G)
H S + Stroke
Cylinder port
H + Stroke
B
B2
CLJ2
Width across A K F BN GF F K A C
flats B1

MM
Effective
thread length
H1
Cushion valve
GB AL 2 x J (Both sides) CLM2
MM

Q
CLG1

V
øD
øE

øD

LY
øE

C
LH
Width across flats
4 x øLD
CL1
Y X VA N X Y T
LT

LX
LS + Stroke
ZZ + 2 strokes LZ
MLGC
(mm)
Effective Width
Bore size (mm) Stroke range (mm) thread length (mm) across flats A B B1 H1 B2 BN BP C D Ee11 F GA GB GC GD GL GL1 GR GE GF CNG
32 Up to 500 19.5 10 22 54 17 6 46 97 1/8 32.5 12 30 13 83 13 45.5 13 8.5 12 4 88.5 18.3
40 Up to 500 27 14 30 63 22 8 52 104 1/8 38 16 35 13 91 14 52.5 16.5 10 12 4 96.5 19.5
50 Up to 600 32 18 35 75 27 11 65 120.5 1/4 46.5 20 40 14 104.5 15.5 58.5 19 12.5 15 5 111.2 22.4
MNB
63 Up to 600 32 18 35 90 27 11 75 134.5 1/4 56.5 20 45 14 119.5 16.5 68 23 17.5 12 9 123.5 20.7
80 Up to 800 37 22 40 102 32 13 95 169 1/4 72 25 45 20 150 19 81 33 22 18 11.5 157 26 CNA
100 Up to 800 37 26 40 116 41 16 114 189 1/4 89 30 55 20 170 19 96 37.5 25 20 17 177 26
Bore size (mm) J LD LH LS LT LX LY LZ K MM N P Q H S T V VA W X Y ZZ CNS
32 M6 x 1.0 7 30 198 3.2 32 57 50 6 M10 x 1.25 27 1/8 37 47 154 34 6.5 13 6.5 22 9 248
40 M6 x 1.0 9 33 209 3.2 38 64.5 55 6 M14 x 1.5 27 1/4 41.5 51 161 39.5 8 16.5 9 24 11 263 CLS
50 M8 x 1.25 9 40 237 3.2 46 77.5 70 7 M18 x 1.5 31.5 1/4 47.5 58 183 47 9 20 10.5 27 11 299
63 M8 x 1.25 12 48 251 3.6 56 93 80 7 M18 x 1.5 31.5 3/8 55 58 197 55.5 8.5 23 12 27 14 313 CLQ
80 M10 x 1.5 12 55 305 4.5 72 106 100 10 M22 x 1.5 38 3/8 61 72 245 61.5 10.5 33 14 30 14 389
100 M10 x 1.5 14 65 329 4.5 89 123 120 10 M26 x 1.5 38 1/2 68 72 265 69.5 10.5 37.5 15 32 16 409
∗ Refer to page 712 for cylinders with a rod boot.
RLQ
Rod side flange style (F): MLU
Rc 1/8
MNBWF GA BC element
BP (Rc, NPT, G) Unlocking port GD GC P (Rc, NPT, G) MLGP
Unlocked when pressurized Cylinder port

ML1C
W GR
GL

GL1

GE P (Rc, NPT, G)
Cylinder port B
H S + Stroke H + Stroke B2
Width across C
flats B1 A K F BN GF K A 4 x øFD
Effective Cushion valve 4xJ
MM thread length GB AL
H1
Q
øFd

V
øD

FB
øD

FY
B2
øE

MM
Width across flats
FE FT VA N F T
ZZ + 2 strokes FX
FZ
(mm)
Effective Width
Bore size (mm) Stroke range (mm) thread length (mm) across flats A FB B B1 H1 B2 BN BP C D Ee11 F Fd FD FE FT FX FY FZ
32 Up to 500 19.5 10 22 56 54 17 6 46 97 1/8 32.5 12 30 13 25 7 3 10 72 38 87
40 Up to 500 27 14 30 65 63 22 8 52 104 1/8 38 16 35 13 31 9 3 10 83 46 101
50 Up to 600 32 18 35 77 75 27 11 65 120.5 1/4 46.5 20 40 14 38.5 9 2 12 100 52 120
63 Up to 600 32 18 35 92 90 27 11 75 134.5 1/4 56.5 20 45 14 39.5 9 2 12 115 62 135
80 Up to 800 37 22 40 100 102 32 13 95 169 1/4 72 25 45 20 45.5 12 4 16 126 63 153
100 Up to 800 37 26 40 120 116 41 16 114 189 1/4 89 30 55 20 54 14 4 16 150 75 178
Bore size (mm) GA GB GC GD GL GL1 GR GE GF J K MM N P Q H S T V VA W ZZ D-
32 83 13 45.5 13 8.5 12 4 88.5 18.3 M6 x 1.0 6 M10 x 1.25 27 1/8 37 47 154 34 6.5 13 6.5 248
40 91 14 52.5 16.5 10 12 4 96.5 19.5 M6 x 1.0 6 M14 x 1.5 27 1/4 41.5 51 161 39.5 8 16.5 9 263 -X
50 104.5 15.5 58.5 19 12.5 15 5 111.2 22.4 M8 x 1.25 7 M18 x 1.5 31.5 1/4 47.5 58 183 47 9 20 10.5 299
63 119.5 16.5 68 23 17.5 12 9 123.5 20.7 M8 x 1.25 7 M18 x 1.5 31.5 3/8 55 58 197 55.5 8.5 23 12 313 Individual
80 150 19 81 33 22 18 11.5 157 26 M10 x 1.5 10 M22 x 1.5 38 3/8 61 72 245 61.5 10.5 33 14 389 -X
100 170 19 96 37.5 25 20 17 177 26 M10 x 1.5 10 M26 x 1.5 38 1/2 68 72 265 69.5 10.5 37.5 15 409
∗ Refer to page 712 for cylinders with a rod boot.
713
P0669-P0756-E.qxd 08.11.17 3:01 PM Page 714

Series MNB
Auto Switch Proper Mounting Position (Detection at Stroke End) and Its Mounting Height
<Band mounting style> <Tie-rod mounting style>
D-A3/G39/K39 D-A9/A9V D-Z7/Z80
D-M9/M9V D-Y59/Y69/Y7P/Y7PV
D-M9W/M9WV D-Y7W/Y7WV/Y7BAL
D-M9AL/M9AVL
Hs Hs
Auto switch Auto switch

Ht

Ht
A B
A B

D-A44 D-A5/A6
D-A59W

A B Hs
Hs
Auto switch
Ht

Ht
A B
Auto switch

D-F5/J5
D-F5W/J59W/F5BAL
D-F59F/F5NTL
A B Hs

Ht

Auto switch

D-P4DWL

Auto switch Hs
Ht
Ht

A 32 B

714
P0669-P0756-E.qxd 08.11.17 3:01 PM Page 715

Cylinder with Lock Series MNB


Auto Switch Proper Mounting Position (Detection at Stroke End) and Its Mounting Height

Auto Switch Proper Mounting Position (mm)


Auto switch D-Z7
model D-Z80
D-M9 D-F5W
D-Y59
D-M9V D-J59W D-A3
D-Y69
D-A9 D-M9W D-A5 D-F5 D-A44
D-A59W D-F5NTL D-Y7P D-P4DWL
D-A9V D-M9WV D-A6 D-J5 D-G39
D-Y7PV
D-M9AL D-F5BAL D-K39
D-Y7W
D-M9AVL D-F59F
D-Y7WV CLJ2
D-Y7BAL
Bore size
(mm) A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B CLM2
32 6.5 4 10.5 8 0.5 0 4.5 2 7 4.5 12 9.5 0.5 0 4 1.5 3.5 1
40 6.5 4 10.5 8 0.5 0 4.5 2 7 4.5 12 9.5 0.5 0 4 1.5 3.5 1 CLG1
50 7 4.5 11 8.5 1 0 5 2.5 7.5 5 12.5 10 1 0 4.5 2 4 1.5
63 7 4.5 11 8.5 1 0 5 2.5 7.5 5 12.5 10 1 0 4.5 2 4 1.5 CL1
80 10 8.5 14 12.5 4 2.5 8 6.5 10.5 9 15.5 14 4 2.5 7.5 6 7 5.5
100 10 8.5 14 12.5 4 2.5 8 6.5 10.5 9 15.5 14 4 2.5 7.5 6 7 5.5 MLGC
Note) Adjust the auto switch after confirming the operating conditions in the actual setting.

CNG
Auto Switch Mounting Height (mm) MNB
Auto switch
D-F5
model D-Z7
D-A9
D-M9V D-A5
D-J5
D-F59F D-A3
D-Z80
D-Y69
CNA
D-M9 D-Y59
D-A9V D-M9WV D-A6 D-F5W D-G39 D-A44 D-Y7PV D-P4DWL
D-M9W D-Y7P
D-M9AL
D-M9AVL D-A59W D-J59W D-K39
D-Y7W
D-Y7WV CNS
D-F5BAL
D-Y7BAL
D-F5NTL
Bore size CLS
(mm) Hs Ht Hs Ht Hs Ht Hs Ht Hs Ht Hs Ht Hs Ht Hs Ht Hs Ht Hs Ht
32 24.5 23 27.5 23 30.5 23 35 24.5 32.5 25 67 27.5 77 27.5 25.5 23 26.5 23 38 31
CLQ
40 28.5 25.5 31.5 25.5 34 25.5 38.5 27.5 36.5 27.5 71.5 27.5 81.5 27.5 29.5 26 30 26 42 33
50 33.5 31 36 31 38.5 31 43.5 34.5 41 34 77 — 87 — 33.5 31 34.5 31 46.5 39
RLQ
63 38.5 36 40.5 36 43 36 48.5 39.5 46 39 83.5 — 93.5 — 39 36 40 36 51.5 44
80 46.5 45 49 45 52 45 55 46.5 52.5 46.5 92.5 — 103 — 47.5 45 48.5 45 58 51.5
MLU
100 54 53.5 57 53.5 59.5 53.5 62 55 59.5 55 103 — 113.5 — 55.5 53.5 56.5 53.5 65.5 60.5

MLGP
ML1C
Operating Range
(mm)
Bore size (mm)
Auto switch model
32 40 50 63 80 100
D-A9/A9V 7 7.5 8.5 9.5 9.5 10.5
D-M9/M9V
D-M9W/M9WV 4 4.5 5 6 6 6
D-M9AL/M9AVL
D-Z7/Z80 7.5 8.5 7.5 9.5 9.5 10.5
D-A5/A6 9 9 10 11 11 11
D-A59W 13 13 13 14 14 15
D-A3/A44 9 9 10 11 11 11

D-Y59/Y69
D-Y7P/Y7V
5.5 5.5 7 7.5 6.5 5.5
D-Y7W/Y7WV
D-Y7BAL

D-F5/J5
D-F5W/J59W
3.5 4 4 4.5 4.5 4.5
D-F5BAL/F5NTL
D-F59F D-
D-G39/K39 9 9 10 11 11 11
D-P4DWL 4 4 4 4.5 4 4.5 -X
∗ Since this is a guideline including hysteresis, not meant to be Individual
guaranteed. -X
(Assuming approximately ±30% dispersion.)
There may be the case it will vary substantially depending on an
ambient environment.
715
P0669-P0756-E.qxd 08.11.17 3:01 PM Page 716

Series MNB
Minimum Stroke for Auto Switch Mounting
n: No. of auto switches (mm)
Auto switch No. of auto ø32, ø40, ø50, ø63 ø80, ø100 Auto switch No. of auto ø32, ø40, ø50, ø63 ø80, ø100
model switches mounted model switches mounted
2 (Different surfaces, 15 2 (Different surfaces, 15 20
same surface), 1 D-A5 same surface), 1
D-A9 (n–2) (n–2) (n–2)
15 + 40 2 D-A6 15 + 55 2 20 + 55
n n (Same surface) 2
(n = 2, 4, 6, 8···) (n=2, 4, 6, 8···) (n=2, 4, 6, 8···)
2 (Different surfaces, 2 (Different surfaces, same surface) 20 25
10
same surface), 1 (n–2) (n–2)
20 + 55 2
25 + 55 2
D-A9V (n–2) D-A59W n (Same surface)
10 + 30 2 (n=2, 4, 6, 8···) (n=2, 4, 6, 8···)
n
(n=2, 4, 6, 8···) 1 15 25
2 (Different surfaces, D-F5/J5 2 (Different surfaces, same surface) 15 25
15 D-F5W
D-M9 same surface), 1 (n–2) (n–2)
D-J59W 15 + 55 2
25 + 55 2
D-M9W (n–2) D-F5BAL n (Same surface)
15 + 40 (n=2, 4, 6, 8···) (n=2, 4, 6, 8···)
D-M9AL n 2 D-F59F
(n=2, 4, 6, 8···) D-F5NTL 1 10 25
2 (Different surfaces, D-Z7 2 (Different surfaces,
10 15
D-M9V same surface), 1 D-Z80 same surface), 1
D-M9WV (n–2) D-Y59 (n–2)
10 + 30 2 15 + 40
D-M9AVL n D-Y7P n 2
(n=2, 4, 6, 8···) D-Y7W (n=2, 4, 6, 8···)
2 (Different surfaces) 35 2 (Different surfaces, 10
2 (Same surface) 100 D-Y69 same surface), 1
D-A3 35 + 30 (n–2) D-Y7PV (n–2)
n (Different surfaces) 10 + 30
D-G39 (n = 2, 3, 4···) D-Y7WV n 2
(n=2, 4, 6, 8···)
D-K39 100 + 100 (n–2)
n (Same surface) 2 (Different surfaces,
(n = 2, 3, 4···) 20
same surface), 1
1 10
D-Y7BAL (n–2)
2 (Different surfaces) 35 20 + 45 2
n
2 (Same surface) 55 (n=2, 4, 6, 8···)
35 + 30 (n–2) 2 (Different surfaces,
n (Different surfaces) 15
D-A44 (n = 2, 3, 4···) same surface), 1
55 + 50 (n–2) D-P4DWL (n–2)
n (Same surface) 15 + 65 2
(n = 2, 3, 4···) n
(n=2, 4, 6, 8···)
1 10

716
P0669-P0756-E.qxd 08.11.17 3:01 PM Page 717

Cylinder with Lock Series MNB


Auto Switch Mounting Bracket Part No.

Bore size (mm)


Auto switch model
ø32 ø40 ø50 ø63 ø80 ø100
D-A9/A9V
D-M9/M9V
BMB5-032 BMB5-032 BA7-040 BA7-040 BA7-063 BA7-063
D-M9W/M9WV
D-M9AL/M9AVL
D-A3/A44
BMB2-032 BMB2-040 BMB1-050 BMB1-063 BMB1-080 BMB1-100
D-G39/K39 CLJ2
D-A5/A6
D-A59W
D-F5/J5
CLM2
D-F5W/J59W BT-03 BT-03 BT-05 BT-05 BT-06 BT-06
D-F5F CLG1
D-F5BAL
D-F5NTL
• The above figure shows the mounting CL1
D-P4DWL BMB3T-040 BMB3T-040 BMB3T-050 BMB3T-050 BMB3T-080 BMB3T-080 example of D-A9(V)/M9(V)/M9W(V)/
M9A(V)L.
D-Z7/Z80 MLGC
D-Y59/Y69
D-Y7P/Y7PV
D-Y7W
BMB4-032 BMB4-032 BMB4-050 BMB4-050 BA4-063 BA4-063 CNG
D-Y7WV
D-Y7BAL MNB
[Mounting screws set made of stainless steel]
The following set of mounting screws made of stainless steel is also available. Use it in accordance with the operating
environment. (Please order the auto switch mounting bracket separately, since it is not included.)
CNA
BBA1: For D-A5/A6/F5/J5 types
D-F5BAL auto switch is set on the cylinder with the stainless steel screws above when shipped. When an auto switch is CNS
shipped independently, BBA1 is attached.
Note 1) Refer to page 1821 for the details of BBA1.
Note 2) When using D-M9A(V)L/Y7BAL, do not use the steel set screws which is included with the auto switch mounting CLS
brackets above (BMB5-032, BA7-, BMB4-, BA4-). Order a stainless steel screw set (BBA1)
separately, and select and use the M4 x 6L stainless steel set screws included in the BBA1.
CLQ
Besides the models listed in How to Order, the following auto switches are applicable. RLQ
For detailed specifications, refer to pages 1719 to 1827.
Auto switch type Model Electrical entry (Fetching direction) Features MLU
D-A93V, A96V —
Grommet (Perpendicular)
D-A90V Without indicator light MLGP
Reed
D-A53, A56, Z73, Z76 —
Grommet (In-line)
D-A67, Z80 Without indicator light ML1C
D-M9NV, M9PV, M9BV

D-Y69A, Y69B, Y7PV
D-M9NWV, M9PWV, M9BWV Grommet (Perpendicular) Diagnostic indication
D-Y7NWV, Y7PWV, Y7BWV (2-color indication)
D-M9NAVL, M9PAVL, M9BAVL Water resistant (2-color indication)
D-F59, F5P, J59
Solid state —
D-Y59A, Y59B, Y7P
D-F59W, F5PW, J59W Diagnostic indication
D-Y7NW, Y7PW, Y7BW Grommet (In-line) (2-color indication)
D-F5BAL, Y7BAL Water resistant (2-color indication)
D-F5NTL With timer
D-P5DWL Magnetic field resistant (2-color indication)
∗ With pre-wired connector is available for solid state auto switches. For details, refer to pages 1784 and 1785.
∗ Normally closed (NC = b contact), solid state auto switch (D-F9G/F9H/Y7G/Y7H type) are also available. For details, refer to pages 1746
and 1748.

D-
-X
Individual
-X

717
P0669-P0756-E.qxd 08.11.17 3:01 PM Page 718

Series MNB
Specific Product Precautions 1
Be sure to read before handling. Refer to front matters 42 and 43 for Safety Instructions
and pages 3 to 11 for Actuator and Auto Switch Precautions.

Design of Equipment and Machinery Selection

Warning Warning
1. Construct so that the human body will not come 3. In order to further improve stopping accuracy, the
into direct contact with driven objects or the time from the stop signal to the operation of the
moving parts of the cylinders with lock. lock should be shortened as much as possible.
Devise a safe structure by attaching protective covers that To accomplish this, use a device such as a highly responsive
prevent direct contact with the human body, or in cases where electric control circuit or solenoid valve driven by direct current,
there is a danger of contact, provide sensors or other devices to and place the solenoid valve as close as possible to the
perform an emergency stop, etc., before contact occurs. cylinder.
2. Use a balance circuit, taking cylinder lurching into 4. Note that the stopping accuracy will be influenced
consideration. by changes in piston speed.
In cases such as an intermediate stop, where a lock is When piston speed changes during the course of the cylinder
operated at a desired position within the stroke and air stroke due to variations in the load or disturbances, etc., the
pressure is applied from only one side of the cylinder, the dispersion of stopping positions will increase. Therefore,
piston will lurch at high speed when the lock is released. In consideration should be given to establishing a standard
such situations, there is a danger of causing human injury by speed for the piston just before it reaches the stopping
having hands or feet, etc. caught, and also a danger for position.
causing damage to the equipment. In order to prevent this Moreover, the dispersion of stopping positions will increase
lurching, a balance circuit such as the recommended during the cushioned portion of the stroke and during the
pneumatic circuits (page 719) should be used. accelerating portion of the stroke after the start of operation,
due to the large changes in piston speed.
Selection 5. The holding force (max. static load) indicates the
maximum capability to hold a static load without
loads, vibration and impact. This does not indicate a
Warning load that can be held in ordinary conditions.
1. When in the locked state, do not apply a load Select the most suitable bore sizes for the operating conditions
accompanied by an impact shock, strong vibration in accordance with the selection procedures. The Model
or turning force, etc. Selection (pages 694 and 695) is based on use at the
Use caution, because an external action such as an impacting intermediate stop (including emergency stops during
load, strong vibration or turning force, may damage the locking operation). However, when the cylinder is in a locked state,
mechanism or reduce its life. kinetic energy does not act upon it. Under these conditions,
2. Consider stopping accuracy and the amount of use the load mass at the maximum speed (V) of 100 mm/s
over-run when an intermediate stop is performed. shown in graphs (5) to (7) on page 695 depending on the
Due to the nature of a mechanical lock, there is a momentary lag operating pressure and select models.
with respect to the stop signal, and a time delay occurs before
stopping. The cylinder stroke resulting from this delay is the
Mounting
overrun amount. The difference between the maximum and
minimum overrun amounts is the stopping accuracy. Warning
• Place a limit switch before the desired stopping position, 1. Be certain to connect the rod end to the load with
at a distance equal to the overrun amount. the lock released.
• The limit switch must have a detection length (dog
length) of the overrun amount + α.
If connected in the locked state, a load greater than the turning
force or holding force, etc. may operate on the piston rod and
• SMC’s auto switches have operating ranges from 8 to 14 cause damage to the lock mechanism. Series MNB is
mm (depending on the switch model). equipped with an emergency unlocking mechanism, however,
When the overrun amount exceeds this range, self- when connecting the rod end to the load, this should be done
holding of the contact should be performed at the switch with the lock released. This can be accomplished by simply
load side. connecting an air line to the unlocking port and supplying air
∗ For stopping accuracy, refer to page 697. pressure of 0.25 MPa or more.
2. Do not apply offset loads to the piston rod.
Particular care should be taken to match the load's center of
gravity with the center of the cylinder shaft. When there is a
large discrepancy, the piston rod may be subjected to uneven
wear or damage due to the inertial moment during locking
stops.

Stop signal
Amount of overrun X Load center of gravity and cylinder Load center of gravity and cylinder
shaft center are not matched. shaft center are matched.
Note) Can be used if all of the generated moment is absorbed by an effective guide.
718
P0669-P0756-E.qxd 08.11.17 3:01 PM Page 719

Series MNB
Specific Product Precautions 2
Be sure to read before handling. Refer to front matters 42 and 43 for Safety Instructions
and pages 3 to 11 for Actuator and Auto Switch Precautions.

Mounting Pneumatic Circuit

Caution Warning
1. Use the hexagon wrenches shown below when 1. Be certain to use an pneumatic circuit which will
replacing brackets. apply balancing pressure to both sides of the piston
CLJ2
when in a locked stop.
Bore size (mm) Bolt Width across flats Tightening torque (N·m)
In order to prevent cylinder lurching after a lock stop, when CLM2
32, 40 MB-32-48-C1247 4 5.1 restarting or when manually unlocking, a circuit should be
50, 63 MB-50-48-C1249 5 11
used to which will apply balancing pressure to both sides of CLG1
the piston, thereby canceling the force generated by the load
80, 100
Foot MB-80-48AC1251
6 25
in the direction of piston movement. CL1
Others MB-80-48BC1251 2. Use a solenoid valve for unlocking which has a
large effective area, as a rule 50% or more of the MLGC
2. When replacing the head side bracket, the tie-rod effective area of the cylinder drive solenoid valve.
nut on the cylinder body also loosens.
After retightening the tie-rod nut at the proper tightening torque
The larger the effective area is, the shorter the locking time will CNG
be (the overrun amount will be shorter), and stopping accuracy
(Refer to Adjustment 1. below.), install the bracket. will be improved.
3. Mounting between air cylinder Series CA1 and
MNB
3. Place the solenoid valve for unlocking close to the
cylinder with lock Series CNA has no
interchangeability.
cylinder, and no farther than the cylinder drive CNA
solenoid valve.
The shorter the distance from the cylinder (the shorter the
piping), the shorter the overrun amount will be, and stopping
CNS
Adjustment accuracy will be improved.
CLS
4. Allow at least 0.5 seconds from a locked stop
Warning (intermediate stop of the cylinder) until release of
1. Do not open the cushion valve beyond the stopper. the lock.
CLQ
As a retaining mechanism for the cushion valve, a crimped When the locked stop time is too short, the piston rod (and
section (ø32 head cover) or retaining ring is installed (ø40 to load) may lurch at a speed greater than the control speed of RLQ
ø100), and the cushion valve should not be opened beyond the speed controller.
that point. 5. When restarting, control the switching signal for the MLU
If not operated in accordance with the above precautions, the
unlocking solenoid valve so that it acts before or at
cushion valve may be ejected from the cover when air
the same time as the cylinder drive solenoid valve. MLGP
pressure is supplied.
If the signal is delayed, the piston rod (and load) may lurch at
Bore size (mm) Cushion valve Hexagon wrench a speed greater than the control speed of the speed controller. ML1C
32, 40 2.5 JIS 4648 Hexagon wrench key 2.5 6. Basic circuit
1) [Horizontal]
50, 63 3.0 JIS 4648 Hexagon wrench key 3
Forward
80, 100 4.0 JIS 4648 Hexagon wrench key 4
W
SOL.A SOL.B SOL.C Action
2. Use the air cushion at the end of cylinder stroke. Backward ON ON OFF Forward
If this is not done, the tie-rod or piston assembly will be Regulator OFF OFF OFF Locked stop
with check 0.5 s or more
damaged. valve ON OFF OFF Unlocked
3 port 0 to 0.5 s
ON ON OFF Forward
normally Pressure
closed center ON OFF ON Backward

Caution SOL.A SOL.C SOL.B OFF


ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Locked stop
Unlocked
0.5 s or more
0 to 0.5 s
1. Adjust the cylinder’s air balance. ON OFF ON Backward
Balance the load by adjusting the air pressure in the rod and
head sides of the cylinder with the load connected to the 2) [Vertical]
cylinder and the lock released. Lurching of the cylinder when [Load in the direction of rod extension] [Load in the direction of rod retraction]
unlocked can be prevented by carefully adjusting this air W
balance.
2. Adjust the mounting positions of the detectors on
auto switches, etc.
When intermediate stops are to be performed, adjust the D-
mounting positions of detectors on auto switches, etc., taking
into consideration the overrun amount with respect to the
desired stopping positions. SOL.B SOL.C SOL.A SOL.A SOL.C SOL.B
-X
W Individual
-X

719
P0669-P0756-E.qxd 08.11.17 3:01 PM Page 720

Series MNB
Specific Product Precautions 3
Be sure to read before handling. Refer to front matters 42 and 43 for Safety Instructions
and pages 3 to 11 for Actuator and Auto Switch Precautions.

Pneumatic Circuit Manually Unlocking

Caution Caution
1. 3 position pressure center solenoid valve and regulator 1. The unlocking cam is an emergency unlocking
with check valve can be replaced with two 3 port normally mechanism only.
open valves and a regulator with relief function. During an emergency when the air supply is stopped or cut off,
Cylinder side Cylinder side this is used to alleviate a problem by forcibly pushing back the
release piston and brake spring to release the lock.
2. When installing the cylinder into equipment or
performing adjustments, etc., be sure to apply air
pressure of 0.25 MPa or more to the unlocking port,
and do not perform work using the unlocking cam.
3. When releasing the lock with the unlocking cam, it
[Example] must be noted that the internal resistance of the
1. [Horizontal] cylinder will be high, unlike normally unlocking with
air pressure.
W
3 port
normally open
Bore size Cylinder internal resistance Cam unlocking torque Width across
(mm) (N) (standard) (N•m) flats (mm)
SOL.C
32 69 2.0 5.5
SOL.B 40 108 5.9 7
Regulator with relief function 50 275 11.8 8
63 432 12.8 10
SOL.A
3 port 80 686 20.6 10
normally 100 765 23.5 12
closed
2. [Vertical] 4. Do not turn the unlocking cam (the arrow or mark on the
[Load in the direction of rod extension] [Load in the direction of rod retraction] unlocking cam head) past the position marked FREE.
W If it is turned too far there is a danger of damaging the
unlocking cam.
SOL.C
5. For safety reasons, the unlocking cam is constructed so
SOL.B that it cannot be fixed in the unlocked condition.

SOL.B

SOL.A SOL.C
SOL.A
W

Release piston
Manually Unlocking Unlocking cam

Warning Locked state Manually unlocked state

1. Never operate the unlocking cam until safety has


[Principle]
been confirmed. (Do not turn to the FREE side.) If the unlocking cam is turned counterclockwise with a tool such
• When unlocking is performed with air pressure applied to
as an adjustable angle wrench, the release piston is pushed back
only one side of the cylinder, the moving parts of the cylinder
and the lock is released. Since the lever will return to its original
will lurch at high speed causing a serious hazard.
position when released and become locked again, it should be
• When unlocking is performed, be sure to confirm that
held in this position for as long as unlocking is needed.
personnel are not within the load movement range and that
no other problems will occur if the load moves.
2. Before operating the unlocking cam, exhaust any
residual pressure which is in the system.
3. Take measures to prevent the load from dropping
when unlocking is performed.
• Perform work with the load in its lowest position.
• Take measures for drop prevention by strut, etc.

720
P0669-P0756-E.qxd 08.11.17 3:01 PM Page 721

Series MNB
Specific Product Precautions 4
Be sure to read before handling. Refer to front matters 42 and 43 for Safety Instructions
and pages 3 to 11 for Actuator and Auto Switch Precautions.

Maintenance

Caution
1.The lock units for Series MNB are replaceable. 3) Apply 0.3 MPa or more of compressed air to the unlocking
To order replacement lock units for Series MNB, use the order port, and pull out the piston rod assembly. CLJ2
numbers given in the table below.
CLM2
Bore size (mm) Lock unit part no.
32 MNB 32D-UA
CLG1
40 MNB 40D-UA
50 MNB 50D-UA
Piston rod assembly CL1
P ≥ 0.3 MPa
63 MNB 63D-UA
80 MNB 80D-UA
MLGC
100 MNB100D-UA
CNG
2. How to replace lock unit
1) Loosen the tie-rod nuts (4 pcs.) on the cylinder head cover
MNB
side by using a hexagon wrench.
For the applicable hexagon wrench, refer to the table below. Old CNA
4) Similarly, apply 0.3 MPa or more of compressed air to the CNS
Bore size Tie-rod nut socket unlocking port of the new lock unit, and replace the new lock
(mm) width across flats (mm) unit’s temporary axis with the previous piston rod assembly.
CLS
32, 40 6
CLQ
50, 63 8
RLQ
80, 100 10
P ≥ 0.3 MPa MLU
MLGP
ML1C
Temporary axis

New

2) Remove the tie-rods, head cover and cylinder tube.

Cylinder
tube 5) Reassemble in reverse order from steps 2) and 1).

Tie-rod
nut

D-
-X
Tie-rod
Individual
-X

Head cover assembly

721

You might also like